·

·

References

  1. Kull, Kalevi; Lindström, Kati; Lotman, Mihhail; Magnus, Riin; Maimets, Kaire; Maran, Time; Moss, Rauno Thomas; Pärli, Ülle; Pärn, Katre; Randviir, Anti; Remm, Tiit; Salupere, Silvi; Sarapik, Virve; Sütiste, Elin; Torop, Peeter; Ventsel, Andreas; Verenitš, Vadim; Väli, Katre 2018. Tartu-Moskva koolkond. In: Salupere, Silvi; Kull, Kalevi (toim.), Semiootika. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 79-97.
  2. Torop, Peeter 1994. Tartu koolkond kui koolkond. Keel ja Kirjandus 10: 579-591.
  3. Kristeva, Julia 1994. Juri Lotmanist. Inglise keelest tõlkinud Mati Soomre. Keel ja Kirjandus 10: 577-578.
  4. Sutanto, Nathaniel Gray 2016. Two theological accounts of logic: theistic conceptual realism and a reformed archetype-ectype model. International Journal for Philosophy of Religion 79(3): 239-260.
  5. Wike, V. S.; Showler, R. L. 2010. Kant's concept of the highest good and the archetype-ectype distinction. Journal of Value Inquiry 44(4): 521-533.
  6. Flage, Daniel E. 2001. Berkeley's archetypes. Hermathena 171: 7-31.
  7. Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi 2021. Foreword: Roman Jakobson in the twenty-first century. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 7-14.
  8. Waugh, Linda R. 2021. Roman Jakobson's work on semiotics and language. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 15-32.
  9. Gramigna, Remo 2021. Facets of signs: Roman Jakobson's semiotic thought. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 33-59.
  10. Gvoždiak, Vít 2021. On metalanguage: Toward Jakobson's fundamental semiotics. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 60-80.
  11. Rodríguez Higuera, Claudio Julio 2021. Never letting go: The search for semiotic universals from Jakobson to biosemiotics. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 81-94.
  12. Chavez Barreto, Eugenio Israel 2021. A small note on phonology and semiotics, à propos the influence of Roman Jakobson in Luis Prieto's Fonología del español moderno. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 95-108.
  13. Griffin, Jonathan 2021. Communal resonance of meaning as seen through Lotman, Jakobson, and Peirce. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 109-131.
  14. Puumeister, Ott 2021. The autonomy of the aesthetic function. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 132-148.
  15. Bennett, Tyler James 2021. Incompatibility, unlimited semiosis, aesthetic function. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 149-163.
  16. Sütiste, Elin 2021. The functional roots of Jakobson's plural concept of translation. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 164-185.
  17. Osimo, Bruno 2021. Translation from rags to riches in Jakobson. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 186-202.
  18. Kroó, Katalin 2021. The syntagmatic and paradigmatic sign development through Jakobson's concepts (aspects of semantic and semiotic dynamics). In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 203-226.
  19. Boyko, Taras 2021. Roman Jakobson and Estonia. In: Sütiste, Elin; Gramigna, Remo; Griffin, Jonathan; Salupere, Silvi (eds.), (Re)considering Roman Jakobson. Tartu Semiotics Library 23. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 245-258.
  20. Shapin, Steven 2006. The Man of Science. In: Daston, Lorraine; Park, Katharine (eds.), The Cambridge History of Science Vol. 3: Early Modern Science. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 179-191.
  21. Shapin, Steven 1988. The House of Experiment in Seventeenth-Century England. Isis 79(3): 373-404.
  22. Shapin, Steven 1989. Who was Robert Hooke? In: Hunter, M.; Schaffer, S. (eds.), Robert Hooke: New Studies. Woodbridge, Suffolk: The Boydell Press, 253-285.
  23. Shapin, Steven 1991. "A Scholar and a Gentleman": The Problematic Identity of the Scientific Practitioner in Early Modern England. History of Science 29: 279-327.
  24. Shapin, Steven 2003. The image of the man of science. In: Porter, Roy (ed.), The Cambridge History of Science Vol. 4: Eighteenth-Century Science. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 159-183.
  25. Ruse, Michael 2009. The Darwinian revolution: Rethinking its meaning and significance. PNAS 106(s1): 10040-10047.
  26. Ghiselin, Michael T. 2005. The Darwinian Revolution as Viewed by a Philosophical Biologist. Journal of the History of Biology 38:123-136.
  27. Orr, H. Allen 2009. Darwin and Darwinism: The (Alleged) Social Implications of The Origin of Species. Genetics 183: 767-772.
  28. Claeys, Gregory 2000. The "Survival of the Fittest" and the Origins of Social Darwinism. Journal of the History of Ideas 61(2): 223-240.
  29. Hull, David L. 2005. Deconstructing Darwin: Evolutionary Theory in Context. Journal of the History of Biology 38:137-152.
  30. Shapin, Steven 2006. The Man of Science. In: Daston, Lorraine; Park, Katharine (eds.), The Cambridge History of Science Vol. 3: Early Modern Science. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 179-191.
  31. Daston, Lorraine 1992. Objectivity and the Escape from Perspective. Social Studies of Science 22(4): 597-618.
  32. Stalin, Jossif 1952. Dialektilisest ja ajaloolisest materialismist: September 1938. Tallinn: Eesti Riiklik Kirjastus.
  33. Tool, Andrus n.d. Filosoofia Eestis stalinismi tingimustes: Stalinismi sünd marksismi vaimust jaselle mõju filosoofia käekäigule Eestis.
  34. van Ree, Erik 2000. Stalin as a marxist philosopher. Studies in East European Thought 52: 259-308.
  35. Stolovitš, Leonid 2009. Naer totalitaarse filosoofia vastu. Akadeemia 7: 1251-1277.
  36. Keyserling, Hermann von 1990[1919]. Ida ja Lääne kultuuriprobleemide seesmistest seostest: Läkitus Ida rahvastele. Tõlkinud Krista Läänemets. Looming 11: 1536-1545.
  37. Keyserling, Hermann von 1990[1919]. Ida ja Lääne kultuuriprobleemide seesmistest seostest: Läkitus Ida rahvastele. Tõlkinud Krista Läänemets. Looming 11: 1536-1545.
  38. Undusk, Jaan 2003. Eesti kui Belgia: Viimne baltlane Hermann Keyserling. Tuna 2: 48-71.
  39. Schmied-Kowarzik, Wolfdietrich 2016. Walther Schmied-Kowarziku teadvusanalüütiline filosoofia. Tõlkinud Juhan Hellerma. In: Sooväli, Jaanus; Matjus, Ülo (eds.), Tagasi mõteldes: Töid filosoofia ajaloost Eestis. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 214-230.
  40. Sooväli, Jaanus 2020. Indogermaanlus, soomeugrilus ja keelerelativism: Friedrich Nietzschest Uku Masinguni ja kaugemale. Tuna 1: 116-127.
  41. Lenin, Vladimir Iljitš 1966[1913]. Marksismi kolm allikat ja kolm komponenti. Tallinn: Eesti Raamat.
  42. Lenin, Vladimir Iljitš 1970[1922]. Võitleva materialismi tähtsusest. Tallinn: Eesti Raamat.
  43. Matjus, Ülo 2016. Filosoofiast Tartu ülikoolis 1940/1941 ja 1944-1991: Filosoofia ajalugu, esteetika, filosoofiliste teoste tõlkimine. In: Sooväli, Jaanus; Matjus, Ülo (eds.), Tagasi mõteldes: Töid filosoofia ajaloost Eestis. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 298-313.
  44. Rees, John 1998. The Algebra of Revolution: The Dialectic and the Classical Marxist Tradition. London; New York: Routledge.
  45. Jürjo, Indrek 2011. Ideed ja ühiskond: Balti provintside mõtte- ja kultuuriloost 18.–19. sajandil. Koostanud Inna Põltsam-Jürjo ja Tõnu Tannberg. Tartu: Eesti Ajalooarhiiv.
  46. Lukas, Liina 2019a. Eesti ja Läti luule sünd Saksa laulu vaimust I. Keel ja Kirjandus 10: 761-774.
  47. Lukas, Liina 2019b. Eesti ja Läti luule sünd Saksa laulu vaimust II. Keel ja Kirjandus 11: 868-878.
  48. Jäsche, Gottlob Benjamin 2002[1808]. Armastus ja usk: Hommikumõtteid Minu Sallyle, õndsale. Tõlkinud Eduard Parhomenko. Akadeemia 12: 2532-2549.
  49. Parhomenko, Eduard 2002. Filosoofiaprofessor Gottlob Benjamin Jäsche, tema usk ja armastus. Akadeemia 12: 2549-2554.
  50. Morgenstern, Carl 1993[1794]. Platoni Politeia'ks nimetatud raamatu eesmärgist ja teemast. Tõlkinud Marju Lepajõe. Akadeemia 1: 97-106.
  51. Ruutsoo, Rein 1987. Personalistliku filosoofia traditsioonist Tartu Ülikoolis 1920-1940. Tartu Ülikooli Ajaloo Küsimusi, 165-178.
  52. Gahlings, Ute 2003. Teekond iseenda juurde: Sissejuhatus Filosoofi reisipäevikusse. Tõlkinud Kairit Kaur. Akadeemia 9: 1819-1843.
  53. Keyserling, Hermann von 1989. Baltikum. Tõlkinud Krista Läänemets, kommenteerinud Märt Läänemets. Looming 6: 812-821.
  54. Keyserling, Hermann von 1990. Filosoofia kui kunst. Tõlkinud Krista Läänemets. Vikerkaar 7: 73-75.
  55. Koyré, Alexandre 1943. Galileo and Plato. Journal of the History of Ideas 4(4): 400-428.
  56. Gyllenbok, Jan 2018. Encyclopaedia of Historical Metrology, Weights, and Measures. Volume 1. Basel: Birkhäuser.
  57. Suppes, Patric; Zinnes, Joseph L. 1962. Basic Measurement Theory. Technical report no. 45. Stanford, California: Standford University.
  58. Giere, Ronald N. 1999. Science without laws. Chicago; London: The University of Chicago Press.
  59. Padgett, Alan G. 2003. The Roots of the Western Concept of the "Laws of Nature": From the Greeks to Newton. Perspectives on Science and Christian Faith 55(4): 212-221.
  60. Golinski, Jan V. 1990. Chemistry in the Scientific Revolution: Problems of language and communication. In: Lindberg, David C.; Westman, Robert S. (eds.), Reappraisals of the Scientific Revolution. New York, etc.: Cambridge University Press, 367-396.
  61. Butterfield, Herbert 1958. The Origins of Modern Science, 1300-1800. New Edition. London: G. Bell and Sons Ltd.
  62. Cantor, G. N. 1975a. The Edinburgh Phrenology Debate: 1803-1828. Annals of Science 32(3): 195-218.
  63. Shapin, Steven 1975. Phrenological knowledge and the social structure of early nineteenth-century Edinburgh. Annals of Science 32(3): 219-243.
  64. Cantor, G. N. 1975b. A critique of Shapin's social interpretation of the Edinburgh phrenology debate. Annals of Science 32(3): 245-256.
  65. Gomperz, Theodor 1901a. Greek thinkers: A history of ancient philosophy. Vol. 1. Translated by Laurie Magnus. London: John Murray.
  66. Chalmers, A. F. 1999. What is this thing called science?. Third edition. Indianapolis; Cambridge: Hackett Publishing Company, Inc.
  67. Vihalemm, Rein 1981. Ühe teaduse kujunemislugu. Tallinn: Valgus.
  68. Encyclopædia Britannica; Or, A Dictionary of Arts, Sciences, and Miscellaneous Literature; Constructed on a Plan, by which the Different Sciences and Arts Are digested into the Form of Distinct Treatises or Systems, comprehending The History, Theory, and Practice, of each, according to the Latest Discoveries and Improvements; and full Explanations given of the Various Detached Parts of Knowledge, whether relating to Natural and Artificial Objects, or to Matters Ecclesiastical, Civil, Military, Commercial, &c. Including Elucidations of the most important Topics relative to Religion, Morals, Manners, and the Oeconomy of Life: together with A Description of all the Countries, Cities, principal Mountains, Seas, Rivers, &c. throughout the World; A General History, Ancient and Modern, of the different Empires, Kingdoms, and States; and An Account of the Lives of the most Eminent Persons in every Nation, from the earliest ages down to the present times. Third Edition. Volume 1. Edinburgh: A. Bell and C. MacFarquhar.
  69. Friedenthal, Meelis 2008. Tallinna Linnaarhiivi Tractatus moralis de oculo. Dissertationes Theologiae Universitatis Tartuensis. Tartu: Tartu ülikooli Kirjastus.
  70. Kołakowski, Leszek 2014[1975]. Stalinismi marksistlikud juured. Revolutsioon Kui Ilus Haigus: Arutlusi totalitarismist, vasakpoolsusest, kommunismist, demokraatiast - aga mitte ainult. Poole keelest tõlkinud Hendrik Lindepuu. Tartu: Hendrik Lindepuu Kirjastus, 101-127.
  71. Markovic, Mihailo 1999[1977]. Stalinism and Marxism. In: Tucker, Robert C. (ed.), Stalinism: Essays in Historical Interpretation. New Brunswick; London: Transaction Publishers, 299-319.
  72. Mertelsmann, Olaf 2010. Sovietiseerimise mõistest. Kõige taga oli hirm. Kuidas Eesti oma ajaloost ilma jäi. Koostanud Sofi Oksanen ja imbi Paju; tõlge eesti keelde: Kadri Jaanits jt; toimetajad Riste Uuesoo ja Maris Makko. Tallinn: Eesti Päevaleht, 27-42.
  73. Annus, Epp 2017. Ma tõstan klaasi vene rahva terviseks: sotskolonialismi diskursiivsed alustalad. Methis. Studia humanoria Estonica 20: 4-26.
  74. Piirimäe, Kaarel 2018. Postcolonialism and the Soviet Union. Epp Annus, Soviet Postcolonial Studies: A View from the Western Borderlands (London and New York: Routledge, 2018). Methis. Studia humanoria Estonica 21/22: 163-169.
  75. Annus, Epp 2018. Postcolonial cosmology or postcolonial critique? A response to Kaarel Piirimäe. Methis. Studia humanoria Estonica 21/22: 169-175.
  76. Koort, Alfred 1948. Minevikust ja tänapäevast. Rahva Hääl Nr. 205 (1735), 29. augustil 1948.
  77. Naan, Gustav 1948. Filosoofia parteilisus. Rahva Hääl.
  78. Makarov, Mihhail 1966. Eesmärk ja vahendid. Tallinn: Eesti Raamat.
  79. Fite, Warner 1907. The Exaggeration of the Social. The Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods 4(15): 393-396.
  80. Hess, M. Whitcomb 1929. Kantor's Language Behavior. The Journal of Philosophy 26(13): 354-356.
  81. de Laguna, Grace A. 1928. Linguistics and the Psychology of Speech. The Journal of Philosophy 25(3): 75-78.
  82. Tufts, James H. 1904. The Social Standpoint. The Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods 1(8): 197-200.
  83. Brown, Harold Chapman 1916. Language and The Associative Reflex. The Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods 13(14): 645-649.
  84. Gault, Robert H. 1915. On the Meaning of Social Psychology. The Monist 25(2): 255-260.
  85. Mace, C. A. 1934. Metaphysics of Emotive Language. Analysis 2(1/2): 6-10.
  86. Mead, George H. 1912. The Mechanism of Social Consciousness. The Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods 9(15): 401-406.
  87. Alexander, H. G. 1937. Language and Metaphysical Truth. The Journal of Philosophy 34(24): 645-652.
  88. Carr, H. Wildon 1923. Intercourse and Interaction. Mind 32(127): 320-327.
  89. Kołakowski, Leszek 2014[1975]. Stalinismi marksistlikud juured. Revolutsioon Kui Ilus Haigus: Arutlusi totalitarismist, vasakpoolsusest, kommunismist, demokraatiast - aga mitte ainult. Poole keelest tõlkinud Hendrik Lindepuu. Tartu: Hendrik Lindepuu Kirjastus, 101-127.
  90. Markovic, Mihailo 1999[1977]. Stalinism and Marxism. In: Tucker, Robert C. (ed.), Stalinism: Essays in Historical Interpretation. New Brunswick; London: Transaction Publishers, 299-319.
  91. Mertelsmann, Olaf 2010. Sovietiseerimise mõistest. Kõige taga oli hirm. Kuidas Eesti oma ajaloost ilma jäi. Koostanud Sofi Oksanen ja imbi Paju; tõlge eesti keelde: Kadri Jaanits jt; toimetajad Riste Uuesoo ja Maris Makko. Tallinn: Eesti Päevaleht, 27-42.
  92. Annus, Epp 2017. Ma tõstan klaasi vene rahva terviseks: sotskolonialismi diskursiivsed alustalad. Methis. Studia humanoria Estonica 20: 4-26.
  93. Piirimäe, Kaarel 2018. Postcolonialism and the Soviet Union. Epp Annus, Soviet Postcolonial Studies: A View from the Western Borderlands (London and New York: Routledge, 2018). Methis. Studia humanoria Estonica 21/22: 163-169.
  94. Annus, Epp 2018. Postcolonial cosmology or postcolonial critique? A response to Kaarel Piirimäe. Methis. Studia humanoria Estonica 21/22: 169-175.
  95. Koort, Alfred 1948. Minevikust ja tänapäevast. Rahva Hääl Nr. 205 (1735), 29. augustil 1948.
  96. Naan, Gustav 1948. Filosoofia parteilisus. Rahva Hääl.
  97. Makarov, Mihhail 1966. Eesmärk ja vahendid. Tallinn: Eesti Raamat.
  98. Melville, Peter 2007. Romantic Hospitality and the Resistance to Accommodation. Waterloo, Ontario: Wilfrid Laurier University Press.
  99. Baron, Marcia 2012. Friendship, Duties Regarding Specific Conditions of Persons, and the Virtues of Social Intercourse (TL 6:468-474). In: Trampota, Oliver Andreas (ed.), Kant's "Tugendlehre". Berlin: De Gruyter.
  100. Van Impe, Stijn 2011. Kant on friendship. International Journal of Arts & Sciences 4(3): 127-139.
  101. Formosa, Paul 2010. Kant on the Highest Moral-Physical Good: The Social Aspect of Kant's Moral Philosophy. Kantian Review 15(1): 1-36.
  102. Trullinger, Joseph 2015. Kant's Neglected Account of the Virtuous Solitary. International Philosophical Quarterly 55(1): 101-117.
  103. Melville, Peter 2004. A "Friendship of Taste": The Aesthetics of Eating Well in Kant's Anthropology from a Pragmatic Point of View. In: Morton, Timothy (ed.), Cultures of Taste/Theories of Appetite: Eating Romanticism. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 203-216.
  104. Baron, Marcia 2014. Kantian Moral Maturity and the Cultivation of Character. In: Cohen, Alix (ed.) Kant on Emotion and Value. London: Palgrave Macmillan, 69-87.
  105. Giamario, Patrick T. 2017. "Making Reason Think More": Laughter in Kant's Aesthetic Philosophy. Angelaki: Journal of the Theoretical Humanities 22(4): 161-176.
  106. Marshall, David 2005. Food as Ritual, Routine or Convention. Consumption Markets & Culture 8(1): 69-85.
  107. Giamario, Patrick T. 2020. Laughter as dissensus: Kant and the limits of normative theorizing around laughter. Contemporary Political Theory.
  108. Anvelt, Leo 1995. Masing, Rosenplänter ja nende aeg. Anvelt, Leo; Aaver, Eva, Laanekask, Heli; Nagelmaa, Abel (eds.) Otto Wilhelm Masingu kirjad Johann Heinrich Rosenplänterile. Tartu: Eesti Kirjandusmuuseum, 17-32.
  109. Masing, Otto Wilmhelm 1995. O. W. Masingu kirjad J. H. Rosenplänterile = Die briefe von O. W. Masing an J. H. Rosenplänter. Anvelt, Leo; Aaver, Eva, Laanekask, Heli; Nagelmaa, Abel (eds.) Otto Wilhelm Masingu kirjad Johann Heinrich Rosenplänterile. Tartu: Eesti Kirjandusmuuseum, 85-129.
  110. Kreutzwald, Friedrich Reinhold 1953. Maailm ja mõnda. Toimetanud Karl Taev. Tallin: Eesti Riiklik Kirjastus.
  111. Paatsi, Vello 2009a. Märt Miti mälestused: sissejuhatuseks. Tuna 1: 128-141.
  112. Paatsi, Vello 2009b. Märt Miti mälestused II: Mart Mitti elulugu, aealuguga ühendatud viisil kirja panema hakatud. Tuna 2: 118-134.
  113. Paatsi, Vello 2009c. Märt Miti mälestused III: Mart Mitti Elu lugu, Aea luguga ühentatud viisil kirja panema hakatud. Tuna 3: 115-129.
  114. Jakobson, Carl Robert 1959b. Valitud Teosed II: Artiklid; Följetonid. Koostanud Rudolf Põldmäe. Tallinn: Eesti Riiklik Kirjastus.
  115. Loorits, Oskar 1954. The Renascence of the Estonian Nation. The Slavonic and East European Review 33(80): 25-43.
  116. Bartlett, Roger 1991. Russia's First Abolitionist: The Political Philosophy of J. G. Eisen. Jahrbücher für Geschichte Osteuropas 39(2): 161-176.
  117. Hupel, August Wilhelm 2016[1791]. Neitsilikkuse väärtusest eestlaste ja lätlaste hulgas. Saksa keelest tõlkinud Mati Laur ja Merili Metsvahi. Tuna 4: 2-6.
  118. Metsvahi, Merili 2018. Esimese öö õiguse stereotüübi leviku eellugu: Mõisnike ja talutüdrukute suhetest regilaulus ning valgustusajastu saksa kirjameeste teostes. Keel ja Kirjandus 7: 521-540.
  119. Laur, Mati; Metsvahi, Merili 2016. Talutüdruk valgustuse paistel: Lisandusi August Wilhelm Hupeli artiklile. Tuna 4: 7-13.
  120. Metsvahi, Merili 2015. "Tüdrukut poisi käte vahelt magamast leida pole nende seas häbiasi." August Wilhelm Hupeli avaldatud talupoegade seksuaalelu kirjeldused eesti perekonna ajaloo kontekstis. Adriane Lõng 1/2: 104-127.
  121. Jürjo, Indrek 2007. Põltsamaa pastor August Wilhelm Hupel kui Liivimaa valgustuse ideaaltüüp. Tänav, Rutt (toim.), Põltsamaa muuseumi toimetised: Põltsamaa lossi sees ja ümber. Põltsamaa: Põltsamaa Muuseum, 159-186.
  122. Ruuskanen, Esa 2018. Framing, valuing, and assessing the environment: August Wilhelm Hupel's perceptions of Baltic nature and settings for human activities. Journal of Baltic Studies 49(2): 199-214.
  123. Bartlett, Roger 2006. German Popular Enlightenment in the Russian Empire: Peter Ernst Wilde and Catherine II. The Slavonic and East European Review 84(2): 256-278.
  124. Kant, Immanuel 2000[1790]. Critique of the Power of Judgment. Translated by Paul Guyer and Eric Matthews. Cambridge, etc.: Cambridge University Press.
  125. Kant, Immanuel 2006[1798]. Anthropology from a Pragmatic Point of View. Translated and edited by Robert B. Louden and Manfried Kuehn. Cambridge, etc.: Cambridge University Press.
  126. Cohen, Alix A. 2008. The Ultimate Kantian Experience: Kant on Dinner Parties. History of Philosophy Quarterly 25(4): 315-336.
  127. Darwall, Stephen 2014. The Social and the Sociable. Philosophical Topics 42(1): 201-217.
  128. Greer, Erin 2017. "A Many-Sided Substance": The Philosophy of Conversation in Woolf, Russell, and Kant. Journal of Modern Literature 40(3): 1-17.
  129. Piirimäe, Eva 2019. Saateks. Herder, Johann Gottfried, Mõtteid Inimkonna Ajaloo Filosoofiast. Saksa keelest tõlkinud Krista Räni. Tartu: Ilmamaa, 955-983.
  130. Piirimäe, Eva 2015. Sociability, Nationalism, and Cosmopolitanism in Herder's Early Philosophy of History. History of Political Thought 36(3): 521-559.
  131. Urban, Greg; Smith, Kristin 1998. The sunny tropics of 'dialogue'?. Semiotica 121 (3/4): 263-281.
  132. Hess-Lüttich, Ernest W. B.; Niederhauser, Jürg 1995. Textlinguistics: Coherence, reference, and cognition. Semiotica 107(3/4): 349-354.
  133. Power, R. J. D.; Dal Martello, M. F. 1985. Methods of investigating conversation. Semiotica 53(1-3): 237-257.
  134. Makkai, Adam 1987. Idiomaticity and phraseology in post-Chomskian linguistics: The coming-of-age of semantics beyond the sentence. Semiotica 64(1/2): 171-187.
  135. Ross, Edward Alsworth 1920. Principles of Sociology. New York: The Century Co.
  136. Machiavelli, Niccolò 1921. The Prince. Translated into English by Luigi Ricci. London, etc.: Humphrey Milford.
  137. Mendelssohn, Moses 1992. Küsimuse kohta: Mis tähendab valgustada? Tõlkinud Kattri Türk. Akadeemia 5: 933-940.
  138. Kant, Immanuel 1990. Kostmine küsimusele: Mis on valgustus? Tõlkinud Eduard Parhomenko. Akadeemia 4: 801-810.
  139. Hamann, Johann Georg 1996. Letter to Christian Jacob Kraus. Translated and Annotated by Garrett Green. In: Schmidt, James (ed.), What Is Enlightenment? Eighteenth-Century Answers and Twentieth-Century Questions. Berkley; Los Angeles; London: University of California Press, 145-153.
  140. Kierkegaard, Søren 1980. The Sickness Unto Death: A Christian Psychological Exposition for Upbuilding and Awakening. Kierkegaard's Writings, XIX. Edited and Translated with Introduction and Notes by Howard V. Hong and Edna V. Hong. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press.
  141. Kierkegaard, Søren 2006. Surmatõbi: Kristlik-Psühholoogiline Mõttearendus Meeleülenduseks ja Äratamiseks. Tõlkinud Jaan Pärnamäe. Tartu: Ilmamaa.
  142. Rousseau, Jean-Jacques 1993a. Arutlus teemal: Kas teaduste ja kunstide taassünd on aidanud kaasa kommete puhastamisele? Esimene osa. Tõlkinud Kristiina Ross. Vikerkaar 1: 57-64.
  143. Rousseau, Jean-Jacques 1993b. Arutlus teemal: Kas teaduste ja kunstide taassünd on aidanud kaasa kommete puhastamisele? Teine osa. Tõlkinud Kristiina Ross. Vikerkaar 2: 53-61.
  144. Marx, Karl 1982. Majandusteaduslikud ja Filosoofilised Käsikirjad 1844. Aastast. Tallinn: Eesti Raamat.
  145. Marx, Karl ja Friedrich Engels 1985. Saksa Ideoloogia. Tallinn: Eesti Raamat.
  146. Voltaire 1986. Filosoofiline Sõnaraamat. Prantsuse keelest tõlkinud Herbert Stillverk. Tallinn: Eesti Raamat.
  147. Voltaire 2019. Filosoofilised Kirjad. Prantsuse keelest tõlkinud Anti Saar ja Marri Amon. Tallinn: Varrak.
  148. de Man, Paul 1978. The Epistemology of Metaphor. Critical Inquiry 5(1): 13-30.
  149. Walmsley, Peter 1995. Prince Maurice's Rational Parrot: Civil Discourse in Locke's Essay. Eighteenth-Century Studies 28(4): 413-425.
  150. Ashworth, E. J. 1984. Locke on Language. Canadian Journal of Philosophy 14(1): 45-73.
  151. Serjeantson, R. W. 2001. The Passions and Animal Language, 1540-1700. Journal of the History of Ideas 62(3): 425-444.
  152. Arikha, Noga 2005. Deafness, Ideas and the Language of Thought in the Late 1600s. British Journal for the History of Philosophy 13(2): 233-262.
  153. Peaden, Catherine Hobbs 1992. Understanding Differently: Re-Reading Locke's Essay Concerning Human Understanding. Rhetoric Society Quarterly 22(1): 74-90.
  154. Pritchard, Timothy 2013. Locke and the Primary Signification of Words: An Approach to Word Meaning. British Journal for the History of Philosophy 21(3): 486-506.
  155. Dawson, Hannah 2005. Locke on Language in (Civil) Society. History of Political Thought 26(3): 397-425.
  156. Aarsleff, Hans 1964. Leibniz on Locke on Language. American Philosophical Quarterly 1(3): 165-188.
  157. Hacking, Ian 1988. Locke, Leibniz, Language and Hans Aarsleff. Synthese 75(2): 136-153.
  158. Locke, John 1741b. An Essay Concerning Human Understanding: In Four Books. Twelfth Edition. Volume II. London: C. Hitch.
  159. Locke, John 1741a. An Essay Concerning Human Understanding: In Four Books. Twelfth Edition. Volume I. London: C. Hitch.
  160. Kaalep, Ain 1989. Teed jätkates. Akadeemia 1: 3-5.
  161. Randalu, Hillar 1989. Õigusriik ja suveräänsus. Akadeemia 1: 6-19.
  162. Tarvel, Peeter 1989. Demokraatia tulevikust. Akadeemia 1: 20-44.
  163. Kivimäe, Jüri 1989. Peeter Tarvel: Le doyen des historiens estoniens. Akadeemia 1: 44-46.
  164. Vilms, Jüri 1989. Vabaduse tuleku eel. Akadeemia 1: 47-81.
  165. Elitis, Odisseas 1989a. Oma luulest. Intervjueerinud Ivar Ivask. Tõlkinud Toivo Pilli. Akadeemia 1: 82-95.
  166. Elitis, Odisseas 1989b. Luulet. Tõlkinud Kalle Kasemaa. Akadeemia 1: 96-100.
  167. Csoóri, Sándor 1989a. Riigist ja kirjanikust. Tõlkinud Edvin Hiedel. Akadeemia 1: 101-106.
  168. Csoóri, Sándor 1989b. Maailma aistiline metafoor. Tõlkinud Edvin Hiedel. Akadeemia 1: 107-115.
  169. Runnel, Hando 1989. Luuletaja mere ääres. Akadeemia 1: 116-135.
  170. Sutt, Toomas 1989. Inimene ja loodus I: Imperativus biologicus. Akadeemia 1: 136-143.
  171. Masing, Uku 1989a. Kiriku osa kultuurimandumisel. Akadeemia 1: 144-150.
  172. Tillich, Paul 1989. Kuidas on teadus viimase sajandi jooksul muutnud inimese enesemõistmist. Tõlkinud Kalle Kasemaa. Akadeemia 1: 151-161.
  173. Laidre, Margus 1989. Sõjaväe õiguskorraldusest Eesti- ja Liivimaa KVII sajandil. Akadeemia 1: 162-178.
  174. Karjahärm, Toomas 1989. Arvustus: Toivo U. Raun. Estonia and the Estonians. Stanford, California, Stanford University, Hoover Institution Press, 1987. 313 pp. Akadeemia 1: 179-184.
  175. Kaalep, Ain 1989. Editorial Note. Akadeemia 1: 185-186.
  176. Masing, Uku 1989b. Taevapõdra rahvaste meelest ehk juttu boreaalsest hoiakust. Akadeemia 1: 193-223.
  177. Iovan, Marțian 2011. The City of the Sun and the Foundations for Social Performance. Society and Politics 5(2): 66-74.
  178. Alexandrin, Glen 2002. Social economics: a perspective of diversity and community. International Journal of Social Economics 29(4): 271-281.
  179. Treves, Paolo 1940. The Title of Campanella's "City of the Sun". Journal of the Warburg and Courtauld Institutes 3(3/4): 248-251.
  180. Campanella, Tommaso 1901. The City of the Sun. In: Ideal Commonwealths: Comprising More's Utopia, Bacon's New Atlantis, Campanella's City of the Sun, and Harrington's Oceana. With introduction by Henry Morley. London; New York: The Colonial Press, 141-179.
  181. Iamblichus 1818. Life of Pythagoras, or Pythagoric Life. Accompanied by Fragments of the Ethical Writings of Certain Pythagoreans in the Doric Dialect; and a Collection of Pythagoric Sentences from Stobæus and Others, Which are Omitted by Gale in his Opuscula Mythologica, and Have Not Been Noticed by Any Editor. Translated from the Greek by Thomas Taylor. London: J. M. Watkins.
  182. Sterne, Colin C. 1982. Pythagoras and Pierrot: An Approach to Schoenberg's Use of Numerology in the Construction of 'Pierre lunaire'. Perspectives of New Music 21(1/2): 506-534.
  183. Eliade, Mircea 1972. Zalmoxis. Translated by Willard R. Trask. History of Religions 11(3): 257-302.
  184. Reiser, Oliver L. 1932. Energy the Soul of Matter. The Journal of Religion 12(1): 61-79.
  185. Dillon, Matthew 2000. Dialogues with Death: The Last Days of Socrates and the Buddha. Philosophy East and West 50(4): 525-558.
  186. Arnett, L. D. 1904. The Soul: A Study of Past and Present Beliefs. The American Journal of Psychology 15(2): 121-200.
  187. Grant, Robert M. 1980. Dietary Laws among Pythagoreans, Jews, and Christians. The Harvard Theological Review 73(1/2): 299-310.
  188. Runia, David T. 1995. Why Does Clement of Alexandria Call Philo "The Pythagorean"? Vigiliae Christianae 49(1): 1-22.
  189. Stocks, J. L. 1915. Plato and the Tripartite Soul. Mind 24(94): 207-221.
  190. Veljan, Darko 2000. The 2500-Year-Old Pythagorean Theorem. Mathematics Magazine 73(4): 259-272.
  191. Solmsen, Friedrich 1983. Plato and the Concept of the Soul (Psyche): Some Historical Perspectives. Journal of the History of Ideas 44(3): 355-367.
  192. Procopé, J. F. 1990. Democritus on Politics and the Care of the Soul: Appendix. The Classical Quarterly 40(1): 21-45.
  193. Prowse, K. R. 1964. Numa and the Pythagoreans: A Curious Incident. Greece & Rome 11(1): 36-42.
  194. Bremmer, J. N. 1992. Symbols of Marginality from Early Pythagoreans to Late Antique Monks. Greece & Rome 39(2): 205-214.
  195. Tate, J. 1939. Plato, Phaedo 92cd. The Classic Review 53(1): 2-3.
  196. Dillon, J. M. 1969. A Date for the Death of Nicomachus of Geresa? The Classical Review 19(3): 274-275.
  197. Bennett, Victor 1945. Thoughts from Pythagoras. Music & Letters 26(4): 195-200.
  198. Harap, Louis 1938. Some Hellenic Ideas on Music and Character. The Musical Quarterly 24(2): 153-168.
  199. Kingsley, Peter 1994. From Pythagoras to the Turba Philosophorum: Egypt and Pythagorean Tradition. Journal of the Warburg and Courtauld Institutes 57: 1-13.
  200. Keith, A. Berriedale 1909. Pythagoras and the Doctrine of Transmigration. The Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland 12: 569-606.
  201. Quasten, Johannes 1942. A Pythagorean Idea in Jerome. The American Journal of Philology 63(2): 207-215.
  202. Skutsch, O. 1959. Notes on Metempsychosis. Classical Philology 54(2): 114-116.
  203. Minar, Edwin L. Jr. 1944. Pythagorean Communism. Transactions and Proceedings of the American Philological Association 75: 34-46.
  204. Reiche, Harald A. T. 1993. Heraclides' Three Soul-Gates: Plato Revised. Transactions of the American Philological Association 123: 161-180.
  205. Stapleton, H. E. 1958. Ancient and Modern Aspects of Pythagoreanism. Translated by G. J. W. Osiris 13: 12-53.
  206. Knox, Peter E. 1999. Lucretius on the Narrow Road. Harvard Studies in Classical Philology 99: 275-287.
  207. Brown, C. C. 1970. The Mere Numbers of Henry More's Cabbala. Studies in English Literature, 1500-1900 10(1): 143-153.
  208. Johnson, Franklin P. 1956. A Philosophic Allegory? American Journal of Archaeology 60(1): 57-61.?
  209. Morrison, J. S. 1956. Pythagoras of Samos. The Classical Quarterly 6(3/4): 135-156.
  210. Burnyeat, M. F. 1962. Time and Pythagorean Religion. The Classical Quarterly 12(2): 248-251.
  211. Morrison, J. S. 1958. The Origins of Plato's Philosopher-Statesman. The Classical Quarterly 8(3/4): 198-218.
  212. Gide, Charles 1971. Introduction. In: Fourier, Charles, Design for Utopia: Selected Writings of Charles Fourier. Translated by Julia Franklin, With an Introduction by Charles Gide, and New Foreword by Frank E. Manuel. New York: Schocken Books, 9-45.
  213. Bell, Daniel 1968. Charles Fourier: Prophet of Eupsychia. The American Scholar 38(1): 41-58.
  214. Roelofs, Joan 2015. Fourier and Agriculture. World Review of Political Economy 6(3): 403-424.
  215. Bowles, Robert C. 1960. The Reaction of Charles Fourier to the French Revolution. French Historical Studies 1(3): 348-356.
  216. Silberner, Edmund 1946. Charles Fourier and the Jewish Question. Jewish Social Studies 8(4): 245-266.
  217. Leopold, David 2011. Education and Utopia: Robert Owen and Charles Fourier. Oxford Review of Education 37(5): 619-635.
  218. Levi, Jane 2015. Charles Fourier Versus the Gastronomes: The Contested Ground of Early Nineteenth-Century Consumption and Tastes. Utopian Studies 26(1): 41-57.
  219. Beecher, Jonathan 1985. Parody and Liberation in The New Amorous World of Charles Fourier. History Workshop 20: 125-133.
  220. Butler, Brian E. 2003. Morality, Economy, and the Nature of the World: Fourier and Thoreau. Studies in Popular Culture 26(2): 89-108.
  221. Zonderman, David A. 1982. George Ripley's Unpublished Lecture on Charles Fourier. Studies in the American Renaissance 1982: 185-208.
  222. Katsaros, Laure 2012. A New World of Love. The Massachusetts Review 53(3): 405-411.
  223. Fourier, Charles 1876. Theory of Social Organization. New York: C. P. Somerby.
  224. Brisbane, Albert 1876. Introduction to Fourier's Theory of Social Organization. In: Fourier, Charles, Theory of Social Organization. New York: C. P. Somerby, 1-72.
  225. Grice, H. P. 1975. Logic and Conversation. In: Cole, Peter and Jerry L. Morgan (eds.), Syntax and Semantics. Vol. 3: Speech Acts. New York, etc.: Academic Press, 41-58.
  226. Maudsley, Henry 1889. The Double Brain. Mind 14(54): 161-187.
  227. Baldwin, James Mark 1896a. The Genesis of Social "Interests". The Monist 7(3): 340-357.
  228. Baldwin, James Mark 1907a. Thought and Language. Psychological Review 14(3): 181-204.
  229. Kant, Immanuel 1855. Critique of Pure Reason. Translated by John Miller Dow Meiklejohn. London: Henry G. Bohn.
  230. Topa, Alessandro 2017. The reemergence of Schiller in Peirce's reminiscences of the Æsthetic Letters: a critical addendum to D. Dilworth's Account of the provenance of Peirce's Categories in Schiller. Cognitio: Revista de Filosofia 18(2): 326-343.
  231. Topa, Alessandro 2018. The Categories in disguise: a categoriological specification of D. Dilworth's account of the provenance of Peirce's Categories in Schiller. Cognitio: Revista de Filosofia 19(1): 160-178
  232. Dilworth, David A. 2014. Intellectual Gravity and Elective Attractions: The Provenance of Peirce's Categories in Friedrich von Schiller. Cognitio: Revista de Filosofia 15(1): 37-72.
  233. Schiller, Friedrich 1845. The Æsthetic Letters, Essays, and The Philosophical Letters of Schiller. Translated, with an Introduction, by John Weiss. Boston: Charles C. Little and James Brown.
  234. Topa, Alessandro 2012. "A circle of categories of which Kant's form an arc": Zur diagrammatischen Form des topischen Zusammenhangs in der frühen Peirce'schen Kategorienspekulatsion. In: Engel, Franz; Moritz Queisner and Tullio Viola (eds.), Das bildnerische Denken: Charles S. Peirce. Berlin: Akademie Verlag, 189-218.
  235. Garrett, Philip C. 1887. Memoir of Pliny Earle Chase. Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 24(126): 287-295.
  236. Chase, Pliny Earle 1863. Intellectual Symbolism: A Basis for Science. Transactions of the American Philosophical Society 12(3): 463-594.
  237. Reich, Emil 1890. Graeco-Roman Institutions, From Anti-Evolutionist Points of View. Roman Law, Classical Slavery, Social Conditions: Four Lectures delivered before the University of Oxford. Oxford: Parker and Co.
  238. Mahaffy, John Pentland 1896. Greek Antiquities. With Illustrations. London: Macmillan and Co., Ltd.
  239. Stout, G. F.; J. Brough and Alexander Bain 1889-1890. Symposium: Is the Distinction of Feeling, Cognition, and Conation Valid as an Ultimate Distinction of the Mental Functions? Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society 1(3): 142-156.
  240. Fox, Robert Bradford 1944. Bronislaw Malinowski: A Critical Analysis. Masters Thesis Presented to the Faculty of the Graduate School of The University of Texas.
  241. Mahaffy, John Pentland 1892. The Principles of the Art of Conversation. Second Edition. Philadelphia: The Penn Publishing Company.
  242. Senft, Gunter 2009. Phatic Communion. In: Senft, Gunter; Jan Ola Östman and Jef Verschueren (eds.), Culture and Language Use: Handbook of Pragmatics Highlights 2. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 226-233.
  243. Nietzsche, Friedrich 1921. The Genealogy of Morals. Translated by Horace B. Samuel. New York: Boni and Liveright.
  244. Dewey, John 1910. How We Think. Boston: D. C. Heath & Co.
  245. McKenzie, Jamieson 1984. Accordion Writing - Expository Composition with the Word Processor. The English Journal 73(5): 56-58.
  246. McDougall, William 1916. An Introduction to Social Psychology. Tenth Edition. London: Meuthen & Co.
  247. Ward, Lester F. 1894. The Political Ethics of Herbert Spencer. The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science 4: 90-127.
  248. Shand, Alexander F. 1914. The Foundations of Character: Being a Study of the Tendencies of the Emotions and Sentiments. London: Macmillan and Co.
  249. Trotter, Wilfred 1921. Instincts of the Herd in Peace and War. London: T. Fisher Unwin Ltd.
  250. Freud, Sigmund 1922. Group Psychology and the Analysis of the Ego. Translated by James Strachey. New York: Boni and Liveright.
  251. Sarles, Harvey B. 1970. An Examination of the Question - Response System in Language. Semiotica 2(1): 79-101.
  252. Stanosz, Barbara 1970. Formal Theories of Extension and Intension of Expressions. Semiotica 2(1): 102-114.
  253. Sonesson, Göran 1999. The life of signs in society - and out of it: Critique of the communication critique. Sign Systems Studies 27: 88-127.
  254. Kull, Kalevi 1999. On the history of joining bio with semio: F. S. Rothschild and the biosemiotic rules. Sign Systems Studies 27: 128-138.
  255. Shields, Allan 1967. F. C. S. Schiller: An Unpublished Memorial by John Dewey. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 3(2): 51-54.
  256. Megill, Kenneth A. 1967. Peirce and Marx. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 3(2): 55-65.
  257. Lowrey, Christopher H. and Priya Venkatesan 2008. Making Science Accessible: A Semiotics of Scientific Communication. Biosemiotics 1(2): 253-269.
  258. Riese, Thomas 2008. On the Real Possibilities of Continuity. Biosemiotics 1(2): 271-279.
  259. Hénaff, Marcel 2008. The Mythologiques: Between linguistics and music. Cognitive Semiotics 3: 20-35.
  260. Sørensen, Jesper 2008. Magic among the Trobrianders: Conceptual mapping in magical rituals. Cognitive Semiotics 3: 36-64.
  261. Morawski, Stefan 1970. Mimesis. Semiotica 2(1): 35-58.
  262. Wykoff, William 1970. Semiosis and Infinite Regressus. Semiotica 2(1): 59-67.
  263. Sánchez, Manuel Cáceres 1999. Scientific thought and work of Yuri Lotman. Sign Systems Studies 27: 46-59.
  264. Danesi, Marcel 1999. The dimensionality of metaphor. Sign Systems Studies 27: 60-87.
  265. Meyers, Robert G. 1967. Peirce on Cartesian Doubt. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 3(1): 13-23.
  266. Cheng, Chung-Ying 1967. Charles Peirce's Arguments for the Non-Probabilistic Validity of Induction. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 3(1): 24-39.
  267. Battail, Gérard 2008. Genomic Error-Correcting Codes in the Living World. Biosemiotics 1(2): 221-238.
  268. Nualláin, Seán Ó. 2008. Subjects and Objects: Metaphysics, Biology, Consciousness, and Cognition. Biosemiotics 1(2): 239-251.
  269. Deacon, Terrence W. 2008. Shannon - Boltzmann — Darwin: Redefining information (Part II). Cognitive Semiotics 2: 169-196.
  270. Holenstein, Elmar 2008. Semiotics as a Cognitive Science. Cognitive Semiotics 3: 6-19.
  271. Bar-Hillel, Yehoshua 1969. Review of Introduction to Theoretical Linguistics by John Lyons. Semiotica 1(4): 449-459.
  272. Shands, Harley C. 1970. Momentary Deity and Personal Myth: A Semiotic Inquiry Using Recorded Psychotherapeutic Material. Semiotica 2(1): 1-34.
  273. Torop, Peeter 1999. Cultural semiotics and culture. Sign Systems Studies 27: 9-24.
  274. Portis-Winner, Irene 1999. The dynamics of semiotics of culture; its pertinence to anthropology. Sign Systems Studies 27: 24-45.
  275. Madden, Edward H. 1966. James H. Fairchild and the Oberlin Philosophy. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 2(2): 131-144.
  276. Weiner, Philip P. 1967. A Soviet Philosopher's View of Peirce's Pragmatism. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 3(1): 3-12.
  277. Witzany, Guenther 2008. The Viral Origins of Telomeres and Telomerases and their Important Role in Eukaryogenesis and Genome Maintenance. Biosemiotics 1(2): 191-206.
  278. Kleiner, Karel 2008. The Semantic Morphology of Adolf Portmann: A Starting Point for the Biosemiotics of Organic Form? Biosemiotics 1(2): 207-219.
  279. Brandt, Per Aage and John Hobbs 2008. Elements in Poetic Space: A cognitive reading. Cognitive Semiotics 2: 129-145.
  280. Tsur, Reuven 2008. Comparing Approaches to Versification Style in Cyrano de Bergerac. Cognitive Semiotics 2: 146-168.
  281. Freeman, Margaret H. 2008. Reading Readers Reading a Poem: From conceptual to cognitive integration. Cognitive Semiotics 2: 102-128.
  282. Kjørup, Frank 2008. Grammetrics and Cognitive Semantics: Metaphorical and force dynamic aspects of verse-syntax counterpoint. Cognitive Semiotics 2: 83-101.
  283. Hoffmeyer, Jesper 2008. The Semiotic Body. Biosemiotics 1(2): 169-190.
  284. Pattee, H. H. 2008. Physical and Functional Conditions for Symbols, Codes, and Languages. Biosemiotics 1(2): 147-168.
  285. Holmes, Larry 1966. Peirce on Self-Control. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 2(2): 113-130.
  286. Cheng, Chung-Ying 1966. Peirce's Probabilistic Theory of Inductive Validity. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 2(2): 86-112.
  287. Drechsler, Wolfgang 1998. The philosophy of Hans-Georg Gadamer. Sign Systems Studies 26: 425-436.
  288. Chebanov, Sergey V. 1998. Totality of semiosphere. Sign Systems Studies 26: 417-424.
  289. Lowe, Ivan 1969. An Algebraic Theory of English Pronominal Reference (Part I). Semiotica 1(4): 397-421.
  290. Smith, W. John 1969. Displays and Messages in Intraspecific Communication. Semiotica 1(4): 357-369.
  291. Ross, Haj 2008. Structural Prosody. Cognitive Semiotics 2: 65-82.
  292. Collins, Christopher 2008. Palaeopoetics: Prefatory notes toward a cognitive history of poetry. Cognitive Semiotics 2: 41-64.
  293. Neuman, Yair and Ophir Nave 2008. On the Semio-Mathematical Nature of Codes. Biosemiotics 1(1): 99-111.
  294. Cowley, Stephen J. 2008. Meaning in Nature: Organic Manufacture? Biosemiotics 1(1): 85-98.
  295. Fisch, Max and Atwell Turquette 1966. Peirce's Triadic Logic. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 2(2): 71-85.
  296. Melvil, Yuri K. 1966. The Conflict of Science and Religion in Charles Peirce's Philosophy. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 2(1): 33-50.
  297. Randviir, Anti 1998. Sign as an object of social semiotics: evolution of cartographic semiosis. Sign Systems Studies 26: 392-416.
  298. Bernard, Jeff 1998. Conceptions of life and man - basics of "social communications" (as exemplified by the "Charter on the (re-)presentation of disabled people in the midea"). Sign Systems Studies 26: 372-391.
  299. Masing, Uku 1969. Review of The New Comparative Mythology: An Anthropological Assessment of the Theories of Georges Dumézil by C. Scott Littleton. Semiotica 1(3): 339-355.
  300. Werner, Oswald 1969. The Basic Assumptions of Ethnoscience. Semiotica 1(3): 329-338.
  301. Brandt, Line 2008. Literary Studies in the Age of Cognitive Science. Cognitive Semiotics 2: 6-40.
  302. Deacon, Terrence W. 2007. Shannon – Boltzmann – Darwin: Redefining information (Part I). Cognitive Semiotics 1: 123-148.
  303. Katz, Gregory 2008. The Hypothesis of a Genetic Protolanguage: an Epistemological Investigation. Biosemiotics 1(1): 57-73.
  304. Kull, Kalevi; Claus Emmeche and Donald Favareau 2008. Biosemiotic Questions. Biosemiotics 1(1): 41-55.
  305. Potter, Vincent G. 1966. Peirce's Analysis of Normative Science. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 2(1): 5-32.
  306. Kernan, W. F. 1965. The Peirce Manuscripts and Josiah Royce - A Memoir Harvard 1915-1916. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 1(2): 90-95.
  307. Kull, Kalevi 1998. Semiotic ecology: different natures in the semiosphere. Sign Systems Studies 26: 344-371.
  308. Nöth, Winfried 1998. Ecosemiotics. Sign Systems Studies 26: 332-343.
  309. Worth, Sol 1969. The Developement of a Semiotic of Film. Semiotica 1(3): 282-321.
  310. Schapiro, Meyer 1969. On Some Problems in the Semiotics of Visual Art: Field and Vehicle in Image-Signs. Semiotica 1(3): 223-242.
  311. Østergaard, Svend 2007. The Dynamics of Interaction and Consciousness. Cognitive Semiotics 1: 111-122.
  312. Waller, Sara 2007. Dolphin Signature Rhythms and the Non-Cacophonous Coyote: Rhythm, cognition and the animal umwelt. Cognitive Semiotics 1: 102-110.
  313. Favareau, Donald 2008. The Biosemiotic Turn. Biosemiotics 1: 5-23.
  314. Farina, Almo 2008. The Landscape as a Semiotic Interface between Organisms and Resources. Biosemiotics 1: 75-83.
  315. Broyles, James E. 1965. Charles S. Peirce and the Concept of Indubitable Belief. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 1(2): 77-89.
  316. Martin, Richard M. 1965. On Peirce's Icons of Second Intention. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 1(2): 71-76.
  317. Johansen, Jørgen Dines 1998. A semiotic mapping of the study of literature. Sign Systems Studies 26: 274-298.
  318. Tarasti, Eero 1998. On post-colonial semiotics. Sign Systems Studies 26: 115-135.
  319. Lieb, Hans-Heinrich 1969. On Explicating "Language" for Linguistics. Semiotica 1(2): 167-184.
  320. Hiż, Henry 1969. Referentials. Semiotica 1(2): 136-166.
  321. Adamson, Tim 2007. Cognition and Conflation: Addressing a paradox in cognitive linguistics. Cognitive Semiotics 1: 87-101.
  322. Violi, Patrizia 2007. Semiosis without Consciousness? An ontogenetic perspective. Cognitive Semiotics 1: 65-86.
  323. Bruni, Luis Emilio 2008. Hierarchical Categorical Perception in Sensing and Cognitive Processes. Biosemiotics 1(1): 113-130.
  324. Matsuno, Koichiro 2008. Molecular Semiotics toward the Emergence of Life. Biosemiotics 1(1): 131-144.
  325. Goudge, Thomas A. 1965. Peirce's Index. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 1(2): 52-70.
  326. Savan, David 1965. Decision and Knowledge in Peirce. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 1(2): 35-51.
  327. Sonesson, Göran 1998. The concept of text in cultural semiotics. Sign Systems Studies 26: 83-114.
  328. Danesi, Marcel 1998. The "dimensionality principle" and semiotic analysis. Sign Systems Studies 26: 42-60.
  329. Scholte, Bob 1969. Lévi-Strauss' Penelopean Effort: The Analysis of Myths. Semiotica 1(1): 99-124.
  330. Ekman, Paul and Wallace V. Friesen 1969. The Repertoire of Nonverbal Behavior: Categories, Origins, Usage, and Coding. Semiotica 1(1): 49-98.
  331. Brandt, Per Aage 2007. On Consciousness and Semiosis. Cognitive Semiotics 1: 46-64.
  332. Oakley, Todd 2007. Attention and Semiotics. Cognitive Semiotics 1: 25-45.
  333. Petrilli, Susan and Augusto Ponzio 2008. A Tribute to Thomas A. Sebeok. Biosemiotics 1(1): 25-39.
  334. Barbieri, Marcello 2008. What is Biosemiotics? Biosemiotics 1(1): 1-3.
  335. Murphey, Murray 1965. On Peirce's Metaphysics. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 1(1): 12-25.
  336. Lenzen, Victor F. 1965. Reminiscences of a Mission to Milford, Pennsylvania. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 1(1): 3-11.
  337. Sebeok, Thomas A. 1998. The Estonian connection. Sign Systems Studies 26: 20-41.
  338. Torop, Peeter 1998. Semiotics in Tartu. Sign Systems Studies 26: 9-19.
  339. Pelc, Jerzy 1969. Meaning as an Instrument. Semiotica 1(1): 26-48.
  340. Mead, Margaret 1969. From Intuition to Analysis in Communication Research. Semiotica 1(1): 13-25.
  341. Jakobson, Roman 1957b. Notes on Gilyak. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 71-97.
  342. Jakobson, Roman 1949g. The Phonemic and Grammatical Aspects of Language in their Interrelations. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 103-114.
  343. Jakobson, Roman 1949f. Comparative Slavic Grammar. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 115-118.
  344. Jakobson, Roman 1948a. Russian Conjugation. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 119-129.
  345. Jakobson, Roman 1957e. Shifters, Verbal Categories, and the Russian Verb. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 130-147.
  346. Jakobson, Roman 1957d. The Relationship between Genitive and Plural in the Declension of Russian Nouns. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 148-153.
  347. Jakobson, Roman 1960b. The Gender Pattern of Russian. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 184-186.
  348. Jakobson, Roman 1962d. On the Rumanian Neuter. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 187-189.
  349. Jakobson, Roman 1966b. Relationship between Russian Stem Suffixes and Verbal Aspects. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 198-202.
  350. Jakobson, Roman 1953e. Pattern in Linguistics (Contribution to Debates with Anthropologists). In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 223-228.
  351. Jakobson, Roman 1955a. Aphasia as a Linguistic Topic. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 229-238.
  352. Jakobson, Roman 1956a. Two Aspects of Language and Two Types of Aphasic Disturbances. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 239-259.
  353. Jakobson, Roman 1959e. On Linguistic Aspects of Translation. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 260-266.
  354. Jakobson, Roman 1959d. Linguistic Glosses to Goldstein's "Wortbegriff". In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 267-271.
  355. Jakobson, Roman 1963e. Parts and Wholes in Language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 280-284.
  356. Jakobson, Roman 1962f. Anthony's Contribution to Linguistic Theory. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 285-288.
  357. Jakobson, Roman 1964b. Toward a Linguistic Classification of Aphasic Impairments. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 289-306.
  358. Jakobson, Roman 1966e. Linguistic Types of Aphasia. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 307-333.
  359. Jakobson, Roman 1964c. Visual and Auditory Signs. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 334-337.
  360. Jakobson, Roman 1967b. On the Relation between Visual and Auditory Signs. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 338-344.
  361. Jakobson, Roman 1966d. Quest for the Essence of Language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 345-359.
  362. Jakobson, Roman 1956c. One of the Speculative Anticipations: An Old Russian Treatise on the Divine and Human Word. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 369-374.
  363. Jakobson, Roman 1960c. The Kazan' School of Polish Linguistics and its Place in the International Development of Phonology. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 394-428.
  364. Jakobson, Roman 1943a. Polish-Russian Cooperation in the Science of Language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 451-455.
  365. Jakobson, Roman 1966e. Henry Sweet's Path Toward Phonemics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 456-467.
  366. Jakobson, Roman 1944a. Franz Boas' Approach to Language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 477-488.
  367. Jakobson, Roman 1959e. Boas' View of Grammatical Meaning. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 489-496.
  368. Jakobson, Roman 1956d. Sergej Karcevskij: August 28, 1884 - November 7, 1955. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 517-521.
  369. Jakobson, Roman 1963d. Efforts Towards a Means-Ends Model of Language in Interwar Continental Linguistics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 522-526.
  370. Jakobson, Roman 1965d. An Example of Migratory Terms and Institutional Models (On the Fiftieth Anniversary of the Moscow Linguistic Circle). In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 527-538.
  371. Jakobson, Roman 1953d. Results of a Joint Conference of Anthropologists and Linguists. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 554-567.
  372. Jakobson, Roman 1961a. Introduction to the Symposium on the Structure of Language and Its Mathematical Aspects. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 568-569.
  373. Jakobson, Roman 1961b. Linguistics and Communication Theory. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 570-579.
  374. Jakobson, Roman 1963e. Implications of Language Universals for Linguistics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 580-592.
  375. Jakobson, Roman 1964d. Results of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 593-602.
  376. Jakobson, Roman 1953e. Vestiges of the Earliest Russian Vernacular. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 611-619.
  377. Jakobson, Roman 1959f. While Reading Vasmer's Dictionary. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 620-649.
  378. Jakobson, Roman 1970b. Tempus ← Rotatio → Adulterium. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 650-652.
  379. Jakobson, Roman 1969c. Linguistics in Relation to Other Sciences. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 655-696.
  380. Jakobson, Roman 1970d. Language in Relation to Other Communication Systems. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 697-708.
  381. Jakobson, Roman 1971d. Retrospect. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. Second edition. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 711-724.
  382. Jakobson, Roman 1928a. The Concept of the Sound Law and the Teleological Criterion. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 1-2.
  383. Jakobson, Roman 1931d. Phonemic Notes on Standard Slovak. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 221-230.
  384. Jakobson, Roman 1932a. Phoneme and Phonology. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 231-233.
  385. Jakobson, Roman 1937c. On Ancient Greek Prosody. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 262-271.
  386. Jakobson, Roman 1949f. Comparative Slavic Phonology. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 413-417.
  387. Jakobson, Roman 1949d. On the Identification of Phonemic Entities. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 418-425.
  388. Jakobson, Roman and John Lotz 1949e. Notes on the French Phonemic Pattern. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 426-434.
  389. Jakobson, Roman 1951a. For the Correct Presentation of Phonemic Problems. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 435-442.
  390. Jakobson, Roman 1952a. On Slavic Diphthongs Ending in a Liquid. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 443-448.
  391. Jakobson, Roman; E. Colin Cherry and Morris Halle 1953b. Toward the Logical Description of Languages in their Phonemic Aspect. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 449-463.
  392. Jakobson, Roman and Morris Halle 1956a. Phonology and Phonetics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 464-504.
  393. Jakobson, Roman 1957a. Mufaxxama: the 'Emphatic' Phonemes in Arabic. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 510-522.
  394. Jakobson, Roman 1958a. Typological Studies and their Contribution to Historical Comparative Linguistics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 523-532.
  395. Jakobson, Roman 1959a. A New Outline of Russian Phonology. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 533-537.
  396. Jakobson, Roman 1960a. Why "Mama" and "Papa"?. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 438-545.
  397. Jakobson, Roman and Morris Halle 1962b. Tenseness and Laxness. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 550-555.
  398. Jakobson, Roman 1926a. Contributions to the Study of Czech Accent. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 614-625.
  399. Jakobson, Roman 1928c. On the Elimination of Long Consonants in Czech. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 626-628.
  400. Jakobson, Roman 1962c. Retrospect. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 629-659.
  401. Jakobson, Roman and Morris Halle 1959b. Note on the Tonality Features of Roumanian Consonantal Phonemes. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 661-663.
  402. Jakobson, Roman 1963b. A Phonemic Approach to the Structure and Evolution of the Common Slavic Prosodic Pattern. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 687-689.
  403. Jakobson, Roman 1964a. The Prosodic Questions of Slavic Historical Phonology Restated. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 690-692.
  404. Jakobson, Roman 1965a. Information and Redundancy in the Common Slavic Prosodic Pattern. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 693-699.
  405. Jakobson, Roman 1966a. The Role of Phonic Elements in Speech Perception. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 706-717.
  406. Jakobson, Roman 1968a. Extrapulmonic Consonants: Ejectives, Implosives, Clicks. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 720-727.
  407. Jakobson, Roman and Morris Halle 1968f. The Revised Version of the List of Inherent Features. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 738-742.
  408. Jakobson, Roman 1971b. Saussure's Unpublished Reflections on Phonemes. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 743-750.
  409. Jakobson, Roman 1971e. Prefatory Letter to Studies in Honor of Eli Fischer-Jørgensen. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Second edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 751-752.
  410. Waugh, Linda R. and Monique Monville-Burston 2002. Introduction to Roman Jakobson, Selected Writings: On Language: The Life, Work and Influence of Roman Jakobson. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Third edition. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, v-lxiii.
  411. Krzyżanowski, Ludwik 1959. A Postscript to "Bronislaw Malinowski: An Intellectual Profile". The Polish Review 4(1/2): 156-157.
  412. Wallace, Anthony F. C. and Raymond D. Fogelson 1961. Culture and Personality. Biennial Review of Anthropology 2: 42-78.
  413. Webster, Steven 1982. Dialogue and Fiction in Ethnography. Dialectical Anthropology 7(2): 91-114.
  414. Homans, George C. 1982. The Present State of Sociological Theory. The Sociological Quarterly 23(3): 285-299.
  415. Kluckhohn, Clyde 1943. Bronislaw Malinowski 1884-1942. The Journal of American Folklore 56(221): 208-219.
  416. Gregg, Dorothy and Elgin Williams 1948. The Dismal Science of Functionalism. American Anthropologist 50(4): 594-611.
  417. Kluckhohn, Clyde 1961. Notes on Some Anthropological Aspects of Communication. American Anthropologist 63(5): 895-910.
  418. Ben-Amos, Dan 1993. "Context" in Context. Western Folklore 52(2/4): 209-226.
  419. Gardiner, H. N. 1913. Affective phenomena - Descriptive and Theoretical. Psychological Bulletin 10(5): 188-193.
  420. Gardiner, Alan H. 1919. Some Thoughts on the Subject of Language. Man 19: 2-6.
  421. Lutkehaus, Nancy Christine 1989. The Use of Another Ethnographer's Field-Notes: Camille Wedgwood's Manam Island Research. Anthropology Today 5(6): 9-12.
  422. Goldsmith, Michael 1988. Malinowski and Gardiner: The Egyptian Connection. History of Anthropology Newsletter 15(1): 5-11.
  423. Nerlich, Brigitte 1988. Philipp Wegener's (1848-1916) Theory of Language and Communication. Henry Sweet Society for the History of Linguistic Ideas Bulletin 11(1): 11-13.
  424. Urry, James 1985. W. E. Armstrong and Social Anthropology at Cambridge 1922-1926. Man 20(3): 412-433.
  425. Wright, William Kelley 1921. McDougall's Social Psychology in the Light of Recent Discussion. The Journal of Philosophy 18(6): 141-152.
  426. Malinowski, Bronisław 1911a. Review of Kwartalink Etnografioncy Lud. Tom. XVI., zesryt I. Lwów, 1910. Folklore 22(3): 382-385.
  427. Malinowski, Bronisław 1911b. Review of La Race Slave by Lubar Niedrle and Louis Léger. Paris: F. Alcan, 1911. Man 11: 64.
  428. Malinowski, Bronisław 1912. Review of Grundlinien einer Vergleichung der Religionen und Mythologien der Austronesischen Völker by Von. P. W. Schmidt. In Denkschriften d. K. Akademie d. Wissenschaften in Wien, 1910. Folklore 23(1): 141-143.
  429. Malinowski, Bronisław 1913c. Review of Across Australia by Baldwin Spencer and F. J. Gillen. 2 vols. Macmillan, 1912. Folklore 24(2): 278-279.
  430. Malinowski, Bronisław 1916. Baloma; The Spirits of the Dead in the Trobriand Islands. The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland 46: 353-430.
  431. Malinowski, Bronisław 1918. Fishing in the Trobriand Islands. Man 18: 87-92.
  432. Malinowski, Bronisław 1920a. Classificatory Particles in the Language of Kiriwina. Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies, University of London 1(4): 33-78.
  433. Malinowski, Bronisław 1920b. Kula; the Circulating Exchange of Valuables in the Archipelagoes of Eastern New Guinea. Man 20: 97-105.
  434. Malinowski, Bronisław 1920c. War and Weapons Among the Natives of the Trobriand Islands. Man 20: 10-12.
  435. Malinowski, Bronisław 1921a. The Primitive Economics of the Trobriand Islanders. The Economic Journal 31(121): 1-16.
  436. Malinowski, Bronisław 1921b. Review of The Group Mind by William McDougall. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Man 21: 106-109.
  437. Malinowski, Bronisław 1922b. Ethnology and the Study of Society. Economica 6: 208-219.
  438. Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník 1993. Introduction: Malinowski's Reading, Writing, 1904-1914. In: Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník (eds.), The Early Writings of Bronisław Malinowski. Translated by Ludwik Krzyżanowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
  439. Malinowski, Bronisław 1993[1904/05]. Observations on Friedrich Nietzsche's The Birth of Tragedy. In: Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník (eds.), The Early Writings of Bronisław Malinowski. Translated by Ludwik Krzyżanowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 67-88.
  440. Malinowski, Bronisław 1993[1906]. On the principle of the economy of thought. In: Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník (eds.), The Early Writings of Bronisław Malinowski. Translated by Ludwik Krzyżanowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 89-116.
  441. Malinowski, Bronisław 1993[1910]. Religion and magic: The Golden Bough. In: Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník (eds.), The Early Writings of Bronisław Malinowski. Translated by Ludwik Krzyżanowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 117-122.
  442. Malinowski, Bronisław 1993[1911-1913]. Totemism and exogamy. In: Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník (eds.), The Early Writings of Bronisław Malinowski. Translated by Ludwik Krzyżanowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 123-199.
  443. Malinowski, Bronisław 1993[1912a]. Tribal male associations in Australia. In: Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník (eds.), The Early Writings of Bronisław Malinowski. Translated by Ludwik Krzyżanowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 201-208.
  444. Malinowski, Bronisław 1993[1912b]. The economic aspects of the intichiuma ceremonies. In: Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník (eds.), The Early Writings of Bronisław Malinowski. Translated by Ludwik Krzyżanowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 209-227.
  445. Malinowski, Bronisław 1993[1913c]. The relationship of primitive beliefs to the forms of social organization. In: Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník (eds.), The Early Writings of Bronisław Malinowski. Translated by Ludwik Krzyżanowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 229-242.
  446. Malinowski, Bronisław 1993[1914]. A fundamental problem of religious sociology. In: Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník (eds.), The Early Writings of Bronisław Malinowski. Translated by Ludwik Krzyżanowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 243-246.
  447. Malinowski, Bronisław 1993[1913-14]. Sociology of the family. In: Thornton, Robert J. and Peter Skalník (eds.), The Early Writings of Bronisław Malinowski. Translated by Ludwik Krzyżanowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 247-267.
  448. Hayakawa, Samuel Ichiye 1949. Language in Thought and Action. London: George Allen & Unwin Ltd.
  449. Barton, George A. 1920. Salutations. In: Hastings, James (ed.), Encyclopædia of Religion and Ethics. Volume XI. New York: Scribner's Sons, 104-108.
  450. Malinowski, Boris [sic] 1920. Spirit Children. In: Hastings, James (ed.), Encyclopædia of Religion and Ethics. Volume XI. New York: Scribner's Sons, 803-805.
  451. Radcliffe-Brown, A. R. 1946. A Note on Functional Anthropology. Man 46: 38-41.
  452. Montagu, Ashley M. F. 1942. Brinoslaw Malinowski (1884-1942). Isis 34(2): 146-150.
  453. Wax, Murray L. 1972. Tenting with Malinowski. American Sociological Review 37(1): 1-13.
  454. Paluch, Andrzej K. 1981. The Polish Background to Malinowski's Work. Man 16(2): 276-285.
  455. Payne, Harry C. 1981. Malinowski's Style. Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 125(6): 416-440
  456. Conrad, Joseph 1914. Preface. The Nigger of the 'Narcissus'. New YorK: Doubleday & Company, Inc.
  457. Darnell, Regna 1977. History of Anthropology in Historical Perspective. Annual Review of Anthropology 6: 399-417.
  458. Gellner, Ernest 1985. Malinowski Go Home: Reflections on the Malinowski Centenary Conferences. Anthropology Today 1(5): 5-7.
  459. Thornton, Robert J. 1985. 'Imagine Yourself Set Down...': Mach, Frazer, Conrad, Malinowski and the Role of Imagination in Ethnography. Anthropology Today 1(5): 7-14.
  460. Lee, Dorothy Demetracopolous 1940. A Primitive System of Values. Philosophy of Science 7(3): 355-378.
  461. Lee, Dorothy Demetracopolous 1950. Lineal and Nonlineal Codifications of Reality. Psychosomatic Medicine 12(2): 89-97.
  462. Cohen, Morris R. 1923. Introduction. In: Peirce, Charles S. Chance, Love and Logic: Philosophical Essays. London: Kegan Paul, i-xxxiii.
  463. Murdock, George Peter 1942. Bronisław Malinowksi. The Yale Law Journal 51(8): 1235-1236.
  464. Malinowski, Bronisław 1942. A New Instrument for the Interpretation of Law - Especially Primitive. The Yale Law Journal 51(8): 1237-1254.
  465. Malinowski, Bronisław 1941. Man's Culture and Man's Behavior. Sigma Xi Quarterly 29(3): 182-196.
  466. Richards, Audrey I. 1943. Bronisław Kaspar Malinowski. Man 43: 1-4.
  467. Gluckman, Max 1947. Malinowski's 'Functional' Analysis of Social Change. Africa: Journal of the International African Institute 17(2): 103-121.
  468. Radcliffe-Brown, A. R. 1949. Functionalism: A Protest. American Anthropologist 51(2): 320-323.
  469. Goldstein, Leon J. 1957. The Logic of Explanation in Malinowskian Anthropology. Philosophy of Science 24(2): 156-166.
  470. Kimpel, Ben 1968. The Contradictory Aspect of Malinowski's Analyses of Religious Rites. Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion 7(2): 259-271.
  471. El-Shamy, Hasan M. 1974. On Darwinian Psychological Anthropology. Current Anthropology 15(1): 90-92.
  472. Hsu, Francis L. K. 1977. Role, Affect, and Anthropology. American Anthropologist 79(4): 805-808.
  473. Hsu, Francis L. K. 1979. The Cultural Problem of the Cultural Anthropologist. American Anthropologist 81(3): 517-532.
  474. Symmons-Symonolewicz, Konstantin 1958. Bronisław Malinowski: An Intellectual Profile. The Polish Review 3(4): 55-76.
  475. Symmons-Symonolewicz, Konstantin 1959. Bronisław Malinowski: Formative Influences and Theoretical Evolution. The Polish Review 4(4): 17-45.
  476. Symmons-Symonolewicz, Konstantin 1960a. Bronisław Malinowski: Individuality as a Theorist. The Polish Review 5(1): 53-65.
  477. Symmons-Symonolewicz, Konsantin 1960b. The Origin of Malinowski's Theory of Magic. The Polish Review 5(4): 36-44.
  478. Mahaffy, John Pentland 1887. The Principles of the Art of Conversation. London: Macmillan and Co.
  479. Giddings, Franklin Henry 1896. The Principles of Sociology: An Analysis of the Phenomena of Association and of Social Organisation. London: Macmillan & Co.
  480. Gardiner, Alan H. 1932. The Theory of Speech and Language. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
  481. Malinowski, Bronisław Kasper 1922a. Argonauts of the Western Pacific: An Account of Native Enterprise and Adventure in the Archipelagoes of Melanesian New Guinea. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, Ltd.
  482. Jespersen, Otto 1922. Language: Its Nature, Development and Origin. London: George Allen & Unwin Ltd.
  483. Sapir, Edward 1921. Language: An Introduction to the Study of Speech. New York: Harcourt, Brace and Company.
  484. Priest, Eldritch 2018. Earworms, Daydreams and Cognitive Capitalism. Theory, Culture & Society 35(1): 141-162.
  485. Ling, Rich and Chih-Hui Lai 2016. Microcoordination 2.0: Social Coordination in the Age of Smartphones and Messaging Apps. Journal of Communication 66(5): 834-856.
  486. Penney, Joel 2017. Social Media and Citizen Participation in "Official" and "Unofficial" Electoral Promotion: A Structural Analysis of the 2016 Bernie Sanders Digital Campaign. Journal of Communication 67(3): 402-423.
  487. Granovetter, Mark S. 1973. The Strength of Weak Ties. American Journal of Sociology 78(6): 1360-1380.
  488. Pullin, Patricia 2010. Small talk, rapport, and international communicative competence: Lessons to learn from BELF. Journal of Business Communication 47(455-476).
  489. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1963d]. Efforts Towards a Means-Ends Model of Language in Interwar Continental Linguistics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 522-526.
  490. Porter, James E. 2017. Professional Communication as Phatic: From Classical Eunoia to Personal Artificial Intelligence. Business and Professional Communication Quarterly 80(2): 174-193.
  491. Spencer, Herbert 1876. The Comparative Psychology of Man. Mind 1(1): 7-20.
  492. Ogden, Charles Kay and Ivor Armstrong Richards 1946[1923]. The Meaning of Meaning: A Study of the Influence of Language upon Thought and of the Science of Symbolism. Eighth edition. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, Inc.
  493. Malinowski, Bronisław Kasper 1913b. Review of Les Formes Élémentaires de la Vie Religieuse by Émile Durkheim. Folklore 24(4): 525-531.
  494. Durkheim, Emile 1915. The Elementary Forms of the Religious Life. Translated by Joseph Ward Swain. London: George Allen & Unwin Ltd.
  495. Malinowski, Bronisław Kasper 1913a. The Family Among the Australian Aborigines: A Sociological Study. London: University of London Press.
  496. Obeyeskere, Gananath 1969. The Ritual Drama of the Sanni Demons: Collective Representations of Disease in Ceylon. Comparative Studies in Society and History 11(2): 174-216.
  497. Lewis, I. M. 1962. Historical Aspects of Genealogies in Northern Somali Social Structure. The Journal of African History 3(1): 35-48.
  498. Lonsdale, J. M. 1968. Some Origins of Nationalism in East Africa. The Journal of African History 9(1): 119-146.
  499. Wein, Hermann 1957. Trends in Philosophical Anthropology and Cultural Anthropology in Postwar Germany. Philosophy of Science 24(1): 46-56.
  500. Feuer, Lewis S. 1953. Sociological Aspects of the Relation between Language and Philosophy. Philosophy of Science 20(2): 85-100.
  501. Sjoberg, Gideon 1955. The Comparative Method in the Social Sciences. Philosophy of Science 22(2): 106-117.
  502. Spiegelberg, Herbert 1951. Supernaturalism or Naturalism: A Study in Meaning and Verifiability. Philosophy of Science 18(4): 339-368.
  503. Feuer, Lewis S. 1957. The Principle of Simplicity. Philosophy of Science 24(2): 109-122.
  504. Hartung, Frank E. 1951. Science as an Institution. Philosophy of Science 18(1): 35-54.
  505. Sarjanoja, Ari-Heikki; Minna Isomursu and Jonna Häkkilä 2013. Small Talk with Facebook: Phatic Communication in Social Media. AcademicMindTrek '13: Proceedings of International Conference on Making Sense of Converging Media. New York: ACM, 118-121.
  506. Kirk, David S.; David Chatting, Paulina Yurman and Jo-Anne Bichard 2016. Ritual Machines I & II: Making Technology at Home. CHI '16: Proceedings of the 2016 CHI Conference on Human Factors in Computing Systems. New York: ACM, 2474-2486.
  507. Chatting, David; David S. Kirk, Paulina Yurman and Jo-Anne Bichard 2015. Designing for family phatic communication: a design critique approach. British HCI '15: Proceedings of the 2015 British HCI Conference. New York: ACM, 175-183.
  508. Baharin, Hanif and Nadiah Zin 2015. Rhythmic Persuasion Model: Shifting from Phatic to Persuasion. AM '15: Proceedings of the Audio Mostly 2015 on Interaction With Sound. New York: ACM, Article No. 1.
  509. McNely, Brian J. 2010. Exploring a sustainable and public information ecology. SIGDOC '10: Proceedings of the 28th ACM International Conference on Design of Communication. New York: ACM, 103-108.
  510. Baharin, Hanif and Salman Khalidi 2015. Fyro: A Symbolic-Based Phatic Technology. OzCHI '15: Proceedings of the Annual Meeting of the Australian Special Interest Group for Computer Human Interaction. New York: ACM, 304-308.
  511. Makice, Kevin 2009. Phatics and the design of community. CHI EA '09: CHI '09 Extended Abstracts on Human Factors in Computing Systems. New York: ACM, 3133-3136.
  512. Wadley, Greg; Frank Vetere, Lars Kulik, Liza Hopkins and Julie Green 2013. Mobile ambient presence. OzCHI '13: Proceedings of the 25th Australian Computer-Human Interaction Conference: Augmentation, Application, Innovation, Collaboration. New York: ACM, 167-170.
  513. Cui, Yanqing; Jari Kangas, Jukka Holm and Guido Grassel 2013. Front-camera video recordings as emotion responses to mobile photos shared within close-knit groups. CHI '13: Proceedings of the SIGCHI Conference on Human Factors in Computing Systems. New York: ACM, 981-990.
  514. Kim, Chang Won and Tek-Jin Nam 2009. Talkative cushion: a phatic audio device to support family communication. CHI EA '09: CHI '09 Extended Abstracts on Human Factors in Computing Systems. New York: ACM, 2631-2634.
  515. Haberland, Hartmut 1996. Communion or Communication: A historical note on one of the "founding fathers" of pragmatics. In: Sackmann, Robin and Monika Budde (eds.), Theoretical Linguistics and Grammatical Description: Papers in Honour of Hans-Heinrich Lieb on the Occasion of His 60th Birthday. Asterdam: John Benjamins Publishing Company, 163-166.
  516. Haberland, Hartmut 1984. A Field Manual for Readers of "The Problem of Meaning in Primitive Languages" by Bronislaw Malinowski. ROLIG-papir 31: 17-51.
  517. Malinowski, Bronisław Kasper 1923. The Problem of Meaning in Primitive Languages. In: Ogden, Charles Kay and Ivor Armstrong Richards, The Meaning of Meaning: A Study of the Influence of Language upon Thought and of the Science of Symbolism. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, Inc., 293-336.
  518. Boell, Sebastian K. 2016. Information: Fundamental positions and their implications for information systems research, education and practice. Information and Organization 27: 1-6.
  519. Mingers, J. C. 1996. An Evaluation of Theories of Information with Regard to the Semantic and Pragmatic Aspects of Information Systems. Systems Practice 9(3): 187-209.
  520. Schwarz, Andrew; Manjari Mehta, Norman Johnson and Wynne W. Chin 2007. Understanding Frameworks and Reviews: A Commentary to Assist us in Moving Our Field Forward by Analyzing Our Past. ACM SIGMIS Database: the DATABASE for Advances in Information Systems 38(3): 29-50.
  521. Goldstein, Leon J. 1957. The Logic of Explanation in Malinowskian Anthropology. Philosophy of Science 24(2): 156-166.
  522. Rex, John 1959. The Plural Society in Sociological Theory. The British Journal of Sociology 10(2): 114-124.
  523. Lounsbury, F. G. 1965. Another View of the Trobriand Kinship Categories. American Anthropologist 67(5): 142-185.
  524. Sahlins, Marshall D. 1963. Poor Man, Rich Man, Big-Man, Chief: Political Types in Melanesia and Polynesia. Comparative Studies in Society and History 5(3): 285-303.
  525. Goody, Jack and Ian Watt 1963. The Consequences of Literacy. Comparative Studies in Society and History 5(3): 304-345.
  526. Peel, J. D. Y. 1968. Syncretism and Religious Change. Comparative Studies in Society and History 10(2): 121-141.
  527. Jaspan, M. A. 1965. In Quest of New Law: The Perplexity of Legal Syncretism in Indonesia. Comparative Studies in Society and History 7(3): 252-266.
  528. Coe, Michael D. 1961. Social Typology and the Tropical Forest Civilizations. Comparative Studies in Society and History 4(1): 65-85.
  529. Ansell, Aaron 2017. Democracy Is a Blessing: Phatic Ritual and the Public Sphere in Northeast Brazil. Journal of Linguistic Anthropology 27(1): 22-39.
  530. Porter, John 1955. Elite Groups: A Scheme for the Study of Power in Canada. The Canadian Journal of Economics and Political Science 21(4): 498-512.
  531. Hexter, J. H. 1968. The English Aristocracy, Its Crises, and the English Revolution, 1558-1660. Journal of British Studies 8(1): 22-78.
  532. Clark, S. D. 1959. Sociology, History, and the Problem of Social Change. The Canadian Journal of Economics and Political Science 25(4): 389-400.
  533. MacGaffey, Wyatt 1968. Kongo and the King of the Americans. The Journal of Modern African Studies 6(2): 171-181.
  534. McCormack, Thelma 1961. Social Theory and the Mass Media. The Canadian Journal of Economics and Political Science 27(4): 470-489.
  535. Tignor, Robert L. 1966. African History: The Contribution of the Social Sciences. The Journal of Modern African Studies 4(3): 349-357.
  536. Bradley, J. F. N. 1968. The Russian Secret Service in the First World War. Soviet Studies 20(2): 242-248.
  537. Ola, Opeyemi 1968. The Study of West African Local Government. The Journal of Modern African Studies 6(2): 233-248.
  538. Drake, St. Clair 1957. Some Observations on Interethnic Conflict as One Type of Intergroup Conflict. Conflict Resolution 1(2): 155-178.
  539. Irele, Abiola 1965. Négritude or Black Cultural Nationalism. The Journal of Modern African Studies 3(3): 321-348.
  540. Wake, Charles Staniland 1907. Vortex Philosophy: Or, The Geometry Of Science Diagrammatically Illustrated. Chicago: C. S. Wake.
  541. Fiordo, Richard 1978a. Kenneth Burke's Semiotic. Semiotica 23(1): 53-75.
  542. Fiordo, Richard 1990. From sincerity to mendacity in personal rhetoric: A discrete look at continuous feelings. Semiotica 80(1): 89-107.
  543. Fiordo, Richard 2009. Symbolic Mediation of Experience, Communication, and General Semantics: In Praise of Clearing Mediated Clouds. ETC: A Review of General Semantics 142-161.
  544. Fiordo, Richard 2011. Contributions to General Semantics from Charles Morris: An Abstract. ETC: A Review of General Semantics 68(2): 156-177.
  545. Fiordo, Richard 2012. General Semantics, Science, and Medicine: A Quality Approach. ETC: A Review of General Semantics 69(4): 364-381.
  546. Fiordo, Richard 2013. Midlevel Abstracting: An Undeserved Zone of General Semantics. ETC: A Review of General Semantics 70(2): 82-110.
  547. Fiordo, Richard 1978b. League's Projection. Semiotica 24(3): 371-379.
  548. Fiordo, Richard 1986. Tales from the Smokehouse: A rhetorical inquiry into erotic didactics. Semiotica 60(1): 1-28.
  549. Fiordo, Richard 1989. The semiotic SEA of questioning. Semiotica 73(1): 25-41.
  550. Fiordo, Richard 1991. Time-binding and Native people: A semiotic interpretation. Semiotica 84(3): 253-273.
  551. Lobinger, Katharina 2016. Photographs as things - photographs of things. A texto-material perspective on photo-sharing practices. Information, Communication & Society 19(4): 475-488.
  552. van Es, Karin 2016. Social TV and the Participation Dilemma in NBC's The Voice. Television & New Media 17(2): 108-123.
  553. Papacharissi, Zizi 2016. Affective publics and structures of storytelling: sentiment, events and mediality. Information, Communication & Society 19(3): 307-324.
  554. Papadima, Aspasia and Evangelos Kourdis 2016. Global meets local: typographic practices and the semiotic role of subtitling in the creation of parodies in Cypriot dialect on Internet texts. Social Semiotics 26(1): 59-75.
  555. Ballantyne, Anne; Victoria Wibeck and Tina-Simone Neset 2016. Images of climate change - a pilot study of young people's perceptions of ICT-based climate visualization. Climatic Change 134(1): 73-85.
  556. Ledin, Per and David Machin 2016. A discourse-design approach to multimodality: the visual communication of neoliberal management discourse. Social Semiotics 26(1): 1-18.
  557. Gaspar, Rui; Cláudia Pedro, Panos Panagiotopoulos and Beate Seibt 2016. Beyond positive or negative: Qualitative sentiment analysis of social media reactions to unexpected stressful events. Computers in Human Behavior 56: 179-191.
  558. Fersini, E.; E. Messina and F. A Pozzi 2016. Expressive signals in social media languages to improve polarity detection. Information Processing & Management 52(1): 20-35.
  559. Kampf, Zohar 2016. All the Best! Performing solidarity in political discourse. Journal of Pragmatics 93: 47-60.
  560. Smith, Benjamin 2016. Turning language socialization ontological: Material things and the semiotics of scaling time in Peruvian Aymara boyhood. Language and Communication 46: 42-50.
  561. Ruesch, Jurgen 1948. Experiments in Psychotherapy: I. Theoretical Considerations. The Journal of Psychology 25(1): 137-169.
  562. Ruesch, Jurgen 1949. Experiments in Psychotherapy: II. Individual Social Techniques. The Journal of Social Psychology 29(1): 3-28.
  563. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1948a]. Social Technique, Social Status, and Social Change in Illness. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 158-172.
  564. Ruesch, Jurgen and A. Rodney Prestwood 1972[1950a]. Interaction Processes and Personal Codification. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 305-344.
  565. Parker, Gail Thain 1977. How to Win Friends and Influence People: Dale Carnegie and the Problem of Sincerity. American Quarterly 29(5): 506-518.
  566. Ashwin, Clive 1984. Drawing, Design and Semiotics. Design Issues 1(2): 42-52.
  567. Helbo, André 1981. The Semiology of Theater, Or: Communication Swamped. Poetics Today 2(3): 105-111.
  568. Reiss, Katharina 1981. Type, Kind and Individuality of Text: Decision Making in Translation. Poetics Today 2(4): 121-131.
  569. Siegert, Bernhard and Geoffrey Winthrop-Young 2007. Cacography or Communication? Cultural Techniques in German Media Studies. Grey Room 29: 26-47.
  570. Babby, Ellen R. 1982. Alexandre Chenevert: Prisoner of Language. Modern Language Studies 12(2): 22-30.
  571. Henstra, Sarah 2000. Looking the Part: Performative Narration in Djuna Barnes's Nightwood and Katherine Mansfield's "Je Ne Parle Pas Français". Twentieth Century Literature 46(2): 125-149.
  572. Lombardi, Olimpia; Sebastian Fortin and Leonardo Vanni 2015. A Pluralist View about Information. Philosophy of Science 82(5): 1248-1259.
  573. Hess, Ursula and Agneta Fischer 2013. Emotional Mimicry as Social Regulation. Personality and Social Psychology Review 17(2): 142-157.
  574. Stephens, Nicole M.; Stephanie A. Fryberg and Hazel Rose Markus 2012. Social Class Disparities in Health and Education: Reducing Inequality by Applying a Sociocultural Self Model of Behavior. Psychological Review 119(4): 723-744.
  575. Carter, Dorothy R.; Leslie A. DeChurch, Michael T. Braun and Noshir S. Contractor 2015. Social Network Approaches to Leadership: An Integrative Conceptual Review. Journal of Applied Psychology 100(3): 597-622.
  576. Bagheri, Hossein; Noor Aireen Ibrahim and Hadina Habil 2012. 'aha, ok, alright' as Phatic Talk: An Analysis on Opening in Multilingual and Multicultural Clinical Consultations. Procedia - Social and Behavioral Sciences 66: 8-16.
  577. Stenström, Anna-Brita 2014. Avoid silence! Keep talking! Pragmatic markers as phatic devices in teenage conversation. Functions of Language 21(1): 30-49.
  578. Tudini, Vincenza 2013. Form-focused social repertoires in an online language learning partnership. Journal of Pragmatics 50(1): 187-202.
  579. Ho, Victor 2014. Managing rapport through evaluation in grounder - A qualitative study. Journal of Pragmatics 61: 63-77.
  580. Obana, Yasuko 2012. Re-examination of yoroshiku onegaishimasu - The routine formula as the linguistic implementation of one's tachiba-role. Journal of Pragmatics 44(11): 1535-1548.
  581. Isurin, Ludmila; Michael Furman and Kate White 2015. Talking to a stranger: Linguistic and non-linguistic behavior of Russian immigrants during 2010 US Census. Language & Communication 40: 38-51.
  582. Drazdauskienė, Marija Liudvika 2012. The Limits of Implicature in the Phatic Use of English. Man & the Word / Zmogus ir zodis 14(3): 4-10.
  583. Feenberg, Andrew 1989. The Writter World: On the theory and practice of computer conferencing. In: Masor, Robin and Anthony Kaye (eds.), Mindweave: Communication, Computers, and Distance Education. Oxford: Pergamon Press, 22-39.
  584. al-Qinai, Jamas B. S. 2011. Translating Phatic Expressions. Pragmatics 21(1): 23-39.
  585. Burnard, Philip 2003. Ordinary chat and therapeutic conversation: Phatic communication and mental health nursing. Journal of Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing 10(6): 678-682.
  586. Rank, Hugh 1984. A Few Good Words for Clichés. The English Journal 73(5): 45-47.
  587. Cruz, Manuel Padilla 2005. On the Phatic Interpretation of Utterances: A Complementary Relevance-Theoretic Proposal. Revista Alicantina de Estudios Ingleses 18: 227-246.
  588. Faucher, Kane X. 2013. Thumbstruck: The Semiotics of Lking via the "Phaticon". Semiotic Review 3.
  589. Lomborg, Stine 2012. Negotiating Privacy Through Phatic Communication. A Case Study of the Blogging Self. Philosophy & Technology 25(3): 415-434.
  590. Slotta, James 2015. Phatic Rituals of the Liberal Democratic Polity: Hearing Voices in the Hearings of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples. Comparative Studies in Society and History 57(1): 130-160.
  591. Radovanovic, Danica and Massimo Ragnedda 2012. Small talk in the Digital Age: Making Sense of Phatic Posts. In: Rowe, Matthew; Milan Stankovic and Aba-Sah Dadzie (eds.), Proceedings of WWW'12 Workshop on 'Making Sense of Microposts', #MSM2012. Lyon, France, April 16, 2012.
  592. Whiteley, W. H. 1966. Social Anthropology, Meaning and Linguistics. Man 1(2): 139-157.
  593. Kunreuther, Laura 2006. Technologies of the Voice: FM Radio, Telephone, and the Nepali Diaspora in Kathmandu. Cultural Anthropology 21(3): 323-353.
  594. Hopkins, Kane 2014. The phatic nature of the online social sphere: Implications for public relations. PRism 11(2).
  595. Alonso, Carlos J. 2002. Editor's Column: Where Were We? PMLA 117(5): 1137-1141.
  596. Holba, Annette 2008. A Response to Phatic Communication: Inviting Dialogic Potential. Florida Communication Journal 36(1): 35-46.
  597. Cruz, Manuel Padilla 2013. An integrative proposal to teach the pragmatics of phatic communion in ESL classes. Intercultural Pragmatics 10(1): 131-160.
  598. Varis, Piia and Jan Blommaert 2015. Conviviality and collectives on social media: Virality, memes and new social structures. Tilburg Papers in Culture Studies, Paper #108.
  599. Frosh, Paul 2011. Phatic morality: Television and proper distance. International Journal of Cultural Studies 14(4): 383-400.
  600. Miller, Vincent 2015. Phatic culture and the status quo: Reconsidering the purpose of social media activism. Convergence: The International Journal of Research into New Media Technologies, 1354856515592512.
  601. Nozawa, Shunsuke 2015. Phatic Traces: Sociality in Contemporary Japan. Anthropological Quarterly 88(2): 373-400.
  602. Ward, Gregory and Laurence R. Horn 1999. Phatic Communication and Relevance Theory: A Reply to Žegarac & Clark. Journal of Linguistics 35(3): 555-564.
  603. Žegarac, Vlad and Billy Clark 1999b. Phatic Communication and Relevance Theory: A Reply to Ward & Horn. Journal of Linguistics 35(3): 565-577.
  604. Coupland, Justine 2003. Small Talk: Social Functions. Research on Language and Social Interaction 36(1): 1-6.
  605. Peace, Adrian 2013. The phatic finger: Public gesture and shared meaning on the highways of the Australian Outback. The Australian Journal of Anthropology 24(1): 99-114.
  606. Ameka, Felix 1992. The meaning of phatic and conative interjections. Journal of Pragmatics 18(2): 246-271.
  607. Bazzanella, Carla 1990. Phatic Connectives as Interactional Cues in Contemporary Spoken Italian. Journal of Pragmatics 14(4): 629-647.
  608. Bullis, Connie and Betsy Wackernagel Bach 1991. An Explication and Test of Communication Network Content and Multiplexity as Predictors of Organizational Identification. Western Journal of Speech Communication 55(2): 180-197.
  609. Ephratt, Michal 2008. The functions of silence. Journal of Pragmatics 40(11): 1909-1938.
  610. Faerch, Claus and Gabriele Kasper 1982. Phatic, Metalingual and Metacommunicative Functions in Discourse: Gambits and Repaprs. In: Enkvist, Nils Erik (ed.), Impromptu Speech: A Symposium. Papers Contributed to a Symposium on Problems in the Linguistic Study of Impromptu Speech (Abo, Finland, November 20-22, 1981). ED277223.
  611. Kita, Sotaro and Sachiko Ide 2007. Nodding, aizuchi, and final particles in Japanese conversation: How conversation reflects the ideology of communication and social relationships. Journal of Pragmatics 39(7): 1239-1241.
  612. McCarthy, Michael 2003. Talking Back: "Small" Interactional Response Tokens in Everyday Conversation. Research on Language and Social Interaction 36(1): 33-63.
  613. Placencia, María Elena 2004. Rapport-building activities in corner shop interactions. Journal of Sociolinguistics 8(2): 215-245.
  614. Placencia, María Elena 2005. Pragmatic Variation in Corner Store Interactions in Quito and Madrid. Hispania 88(3): 583-598.
  615. Schlieben-Lange, Brigitte 1977. The Language Situation in Southern France. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 12: 101-108.
  616. Grinker, Roy R. 1956a. Preface. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, v-vii.
  617. Ruesch, Jurgen 1956a. Introduction. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, ix-xi.
  618. Grinker, Roy R. 1956b. The Intrapersonal Organization. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 3-15.
  619. Spiegel, John P. 1956a. A Model for Relationships Among Systems. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 16-26.
  620. Shakow, David 1956a. The Psychological System. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 27-35.
  621. Ruesch, Jurgen 1956a. The Observer and the Observed: Human Communication Theory. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 36-54.
  622. Parsons, Talcott 1956a. The Social System: A General Theory of Action. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 55-69.
  623. Thompson, Laura 1956. The Societal System, Culture and the Community. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 70-82.
  624. Kluckhohn, Florence 1956. Value Orientations. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 83-93.
  625. Henry, Jules 1956a. A System of Socio-Psychiatric Invariants. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 94-109.
  626. Grinker (ed.) 1956a. General Discussion Terminating the First Conference. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 110-131.
  627. Grinker, Roy R. 1956c. Comparisons between Systems of Organization. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 135-141.
  628. Toman, James E. P. 1956a. Multiple Origins of the Uniqueness of Human Society. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 142-146.
  629. Emerson, Alfred E. 1956. Homeostasis and Comparison of Systems. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 147-163.
  630. Spiegel, John P. 1956b. Comparison of Psychological and Group Foci. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 164-180.
  631. Shakow, David 1956b. Comparison of Psychological and Group Foci (Continued). In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 181-189.
  632. Parsons, Talcott 1956b. The Relation Between the Small Group and the Larger Social System. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 190-200.
  633. Frank, Lawrence K. 1956. Social Systems and Culture. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 201-222.
  634. Rapoport, Anatol 1956a. Homeostasis Reconsidered. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 225-246.
  635. Toman, James E. P. 1956b. Stability Vs. Adaptation: Some Speculations on the Evolution of Dynamic Reciprocating Mechanisms. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 247-263.
  636. Henry, Jules 1956b. Homeostasis in a Special Life Situation. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 264-277.
  637. Deutsch, Karl 1956. Autonomy and Boundaries According to Communications Theory. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 298-297.
  638. Grinker (ed.) 1956b. Concluding Discussion and an Outline for Future Conference Deliberations. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 298-304.
  639. Rapoport, Anatol 1956b. Statistical Boundaries. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 307-324.
  640. Parsons, Talcott 1956c. Boundary Relations Between Sociocultural and Personality Systems. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 325-339.
  641. Ruesch, Jurgen 1956c. Analysis of Various Types of Boundaries. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 340-361.
  642. Grinker, Roy R. 1956d. Summary. In: Grinker, Roy R. (ed.), Toward a Unified Theory of Human Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 365-375.
  643. Abercrombie, David 1956. Problems and Principles: Studies in the teaching of English as a second language. London: Longmans.
  644. Harkness, Nicholas 2015. The Pragmatics of Qualia in Practice. Annual Review of Anthropology 44: 573-589.
  645. Lemon, Alaina 2013. Touching the gap: Social qualia and Cold War contact. Anthropological Theory 13(1-2): 67-88.
  646. Latour, Bruno 2003. What if we Talked Politics a Little? Contemporary Political Theory 2: 143-165.
  647. François, Charles 1999. Systemics and cybernetics in a historical perspective. Systems Research & Behavioral Science 16(3): 203-219.
  648. Evans, Annette Henrietta Margaretha 2007. The Development of Jewish Ideas of Angels: Egyptian and Hellenistic Connections ca. 600 BCE to ca. 200 CE. Dissertation Presented for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
  649. Kosior, Wojciech 2013. The Angel in the Hebrew Bible from the Statistic and Hermeneutic Perspectives. Some Remarks on the Interpolation Theory. The Polish Journal of Biblical Research 12(1): 55-70.
  650. Fusaroli, Riccardo; Marcus Perlman; Alan Mislove; Alexandra Paxton; Teenie Matlock and Rick Dale 2015. Timescales of Massive Human Entrainment. PLoS ONE 10(4): e0122742.
  651. Schandorf, Michael 2012. Mediated gesture: Paralinguistic communication and phatic text. Convergence: The International Journal of Research into New Media Technologies 19(3): 319-344.
  652. Haverkate, Henk 1988. Politeness strategies in verbal interaction: An analysis of directness and indirectness in speech acts. Semiotica 71(1): 59-71.
  653. Coupland, Justine; Nikolas Coupland and Jeffrey D. Robinson 1992. "How are you?": Negotiating phatic communion. Language in Society 21: 207-230.
  654. La Barre, Weston 1954. The Human Animal. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
  655. Blanco, Patricia Prieto 2010. Family Photography as a phatic construction. Networking Knowledge: Journal of the MeCCSA Postgraduate Network 3(2).
  656. Urbanová, Ludmila 2007. Phatic communion and small talk in fictional dialogues. In: Butler, Christopher S.; Raquel Hidalgo Downing and Julia Lavid (eds.), Functional Perspectives on Grammar and Discourse: In Honour of Angela Downing. Studies in Language Companion Series 28. Amsterdam; Philadelphia: John Benjamins Publishing Copmany, 349-357.
  657. Meltzer, Bernard N. and Gil Richard Musolf 2003. Phatic Communion: Bringing Unfocused Interaction into Focus. In: Musolf, Gil Richard, Structure and Agency in Everyday Life: An Introduction to Social Psychology. Second Edition. Lanham; etc.: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers, Inc., 141-154.
  658. Genosko, Gary 2000. Phatic (Dys)functions: The Shifting Contour of the TV Screen. Semiotics Institute Online lecture.
  659. Žegarac, Vlad and Billy Clark 1999. Phatic interpretations and phatic communication. Journal of Linguistics 35(2): 321-346.
  660. Dahlberg, Lincoln 2011. Re-constructing digital democracy: An outline of four 'positions'. New Media Society 13(6): 855-872.
  661. Harris, Roy 1996. Signs, Language and Communication: Integrational and segregational approaches. London; New York: Routledge.
  662. Licoppe, Chrisitan and Zbigniew Smoreda 2005. Are social networks technologically embedded? How networks are changing today with changes in communication technology. Social Networks 27: 317-335.
  663. Vetere, Frank; Steve Howard and Martin R. Gibbs 2005. Phatic Technologies: Sustaining Sociability through Ubiquitous Computing. Proceedings of CHI 2005, April 2-7, Portland, Oregon, USA.
  664. Miller, Vincent 2008. New Media, Networking and Phatic Culture. Convergence: The International Journal of Research into New Media Technologies 14(4): 387-400.
  665. Wang, Victoria; John V. Tucker and Kevin Haines 2012. Phatic technologies in modern society. Technology in Society 34(1): 84-93.
  666. Wang, Victoria; John V. Tucker and Tracey E. Rihll 2011. On phatic technologies for creating and maintaining human relationships. Technology in Society 33(1): 44-51.
  667. Laver, John 1975. Communicative functions of phatic communion. In: Kendon, Adam; Richard M. Harris and Mary Ritchie Key (eds.), Organization of Behavior in Face-to-face Interaction. The Hague: Mouton, 215-238.
  668. Brown, Peter C.; Henry L. Roediger III & Mark A. McDaniel 2014. Make It Stick: The Science of Successful Learning. Cambridge (Mass.); London: The Belknap Press.
  669. Sanders, Bernie 2011. The Speech: A Historic Filibuster on Corporate Greed and the Decline of Our Middle Class. New York: Nation Books.
  670. Konopka, Jakub 2013. Technology and Individualism in The City and The Stars by A. C. Clarke. Bachelor thesis. Supervised by Ladislav Vít. Faculty of Arts and Philosophy. University of Pardubice.
  671. Piatigorsky, Alexandr M. and Boris A. Uspensky 1975. Personological Classification as a Semiotic Problem. Semiotica 15(2): 99-120.
  672. Jacobsen, Michael Hviid 2004. From Solid Modern Utopia to Liquid Modern Anti-Utopia? Tracing the Utopian Strand in the Sociology of Zygmunt Bauman. Utopian Studies 15(1): 63-87.
  673. Jacobs, Naomi 2007. Dissent, Assent, and the Body in Nineteen Eghty-Four. Utopian Studies 18(1): 3-20.
  674. Lotman, Juri 1977[1970]. The Structure of the Artistic Text. Translated by Gail Lenhoff and Ronald Vroon. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
  675. Pugliese, Joseph 2009. Preincident Indices of Criminality: Facecrime and Project Hostile Intent. Griffith Law Review 18(2): 314-330.
  676. Haywood, Ian 1988. Facecrime: George Orwell and the physiognomy of politics. Textual Practice 2(3): 345-366.
  677. Clay, Edmund R. 1882. The Alternative: A Study in Psychology. London: MacMillan and Co.
  678. Lewes, George Henry 1901. The principles of success in literature. Edited by WM. Dallam Armes. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
  679. Wright, T. H. 1892. Appendix: The Sound-Element in Verse. In: The Philosophy of Style; Together with an Essay on Style by T. H. Wright. With introduction and notes by Fred N. Scott. Second Edition. Boston, Allyn and Bacon, 61-63.
  680. Spencer, Herbert 1892. The Philosophy of Style; Together with an Essay on Style by T. H. Wright. With introduction and notes by Fred N. Scott. Second Edition. Boston, Allyn and Bacon.
  681. Shklovsky, Victor 2006[1917]. Art as Technique. In: Richter, David H. (ed.), The Critical Tradition: Classic Texts and Contemporary Trends. Third Edition. Boston: Bedford/St. Martin's, 774-784.
  682. Seppälä, Serafim 2003. In Speechless Ecstasy: Expression and Interpretation of Mystical Experience in Classical Syriac and Sufi Literature. Helsinki: Finnish Oriental Society.
  683. DelMonte, Michael 2009. Empty Thy Mind and Come to Thy Senses: A De-constructive Path to Inner Peace. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 449-479.
  684. van Quekelberghe, Renaud 2009. Mindfulness and Psychotherapy: The Revival of Indian Meditative Traditions within Modern Psychology, Psychotherapy, and Medicine. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 435-447.
  685. Kreitler, Shulamith 2009. Altered States of Consciousness as Structural Variations of the Cognitive System. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 407-434.
  686. Baker, John R. 2009. Psychedelics, Culture, and Consciousness: Insights from the Biocultural Perspective. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 389-405.
  687. Eigner, Dagmar 2009. Transformation of Consciousness through Suffering, Devotion, and Meditation. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 369-388.
  688. Riboli, Diana 2009. Shamans and Transformation in Nepal and Peninsular Malaysia. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 347-367.
  689. Baier, Karl 2009. Meditation and Contemplation in High to Late Medieval Europe. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 321-345.
  690. Rastelli, Marion 2009. Perceiving God and Becoming Like Him: Yogic Perception and Its Implications in the Viṣṇuitic Tradition of Pāñcarātra. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 299-317.
  691. Schmücker, Marcus 2009. Yogic Perception According to the Later Tradition of the Viśiṣṭādvaita Vedānta. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 283-298.
  692. Maas, Philipp André 2009. The So-called Yoga of Suppression in the Pātañjala Yogaśāstra. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 263-282.
  693. Almogi, Orna 2009. The Materiality and Immanence of Gnosis in Some rNying-ma Tantric Sources. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 241-262.
  694. Wangchuk, Dorij 2009. A Relativity Theory of the Purity and Validity of Perception in Indo-Tibetan Buddhism. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 215-239.
  695. Eltschinger, Vincent 2009. On the Career of the Cofnition of Yogins. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 169-213.
  696. MacDonald, Anne 2009. Knowing Nothing: Candrakīrti and Yogic Perception. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 133-168.
  697. Franco, Eli 2009b. Meditation and Metaphysics: On their Mutual Relationship in South Asian Buddhism. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 93-132.
  698. Taber, John 2009. Yoga and our Epistemic Predicament. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 71-92.
  699. Franco, Eli 2009a. Introduction. In: Franco, Eli and Dagmar Eigner (eds.), Yogic Perception, Meditation and Altered States of Consciousness. Wien: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1-51.
  700. Jaworski, Adam 2008[1993]. The Power of Silence in Communication. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 175-181.
  701. Farinelli, Lisa 2008. The Sounds of Seduction and Affection. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 160-168.
  702. Kraut, Robert E. and Robert E. Johnston 2008[1979]. Social and Emotional Messages of Smiling. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 139-143.
  703. Grumet, Gerald W. 2008[1983]. Eye Contact: The Core of Interpersonal Relatedness. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 119-129.
  704. Ekman, Paul and Wallace V. Friesen 2008[1972]. Hand Movements. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 105-108.
  705. Furlow, F. Bryant 2008[1996]. The Smell of Love. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 86-93.
  706. Frank, Mark G. and Thomas Gilovich 2008[1988]. Black Uniforms and Aggression in Professional Sports. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 82-85.
  707. Kaiser, Susan B. 2008[1997]. Women's Appearance and Clothing within Organizations. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 74-81.
  708. Kurzban, Robert & Jason Weeden 2008[2005]. HurryDate: Mate Preferences in Action. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 59-68.
  709. Myers, Philip N., Jr., and Frank A. Biocca 2008[1992]. The Effect of Television Advertising and Programming on Body Image Distortions in Young Women. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 50-58.
  710. Hecht, Michael L. and Laura K. Guerrero 2008. Perspectives on Nonverbal Research Methods. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 27-43.
  711. Spitzberg, Brian H. 2008. Perspectives on Nonverbal Communication Skills. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 21-26.
  712. Guerrero, Laura K., Michael L. Hecht and Jospeh A. DeVito 2008. Perspectives on Defining and Understanding Nonverbal Communication. In: Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.), The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press, 3-20.
  713. Guerrero, Laura K. and Michael L. Hecht (eds.) 2008. The Nonverbal Communication Reader: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Third Edition. Long Grove: Waveland Press.
  714. Lotman, Mihhail 2013. Afterword: Semiotics and Unpredictability. In: Pilchikov, Igor and Silvi Salupere (eds.), The Unpredictable Workings of Culture. Translated by Brian James Baer. Tallinn: TLU Press, 239-278.
  715. Kuzovkina, Tatiana 2013. Afterword to the Russian Edition. In: Pilchikov, Igor and Silvi Salupere (eds.), The Unpredictable Workings of Culture. Translated by Brian James Baer. Tallinn: TLU Press, 233-238.
  716. Lotman, Juri M. 2013. The Unpredictable Workings of Culture. Translated by Brian James Baer. Edited by Igor Pilchikov and Silvi Salupere. Tallinn: TLU Press.
  717. Ivanov, Vyacheslav V. 2013. Preface to the Russian Edition. In: Pilchikov, Igor and Silvi Salupere (eds.), The Unpredictable Workings of Culture. Translated by Brian James Baer. Tallinn: TLU Press, 7-16.
  718. Mowrer, O. Hobart 1950. On the psychology of "talking birds": A contribution to language and personality theory. In: Learning theory and personality dynamics: Selected papers. New York: Ronald, 688-726.
  719. Andrews, Edna 1999. Lotman's communication act and semiosis. Semiotica 126(1/4): 1-15.
  720. Andrews, Edna 2003. Redefining textual boundaries: Torop and the Tartu school of semiotics. Semiotica 144(1/4): 377-380.
  721. Benjamin, Gail R. and Chet A. Creider 1975. Social distinctions in non-verbal behavior. Semiotica 14(1): 52-60.
  722. Bilmes, Jack 1976. Meaning and interpretation. Semiotica 16(2) 115-128.
  723. Bilmes, Jack 1994. Constituting silence Life in the world of total meaning. Semiotica 98(1/2): 73-88.
  724. Santaella Braga, Maria Lucia 1988. For a classification of visual signs. Semiotica 70(1/2) 59-78.
  725. Bruneau, Tom 1985. Silencing and stilling processes: The creative and temporal bases of signs. Semiotica 56(3/4): 279-290.
  726. Butchart, Garnet C. 2011. An excess of signification: Or, what is an event? Semiotica 187(1/4): 291-307.
  727. Buyssens, Eric 1988. Reference and communication. Semiotica 70(3/4): 191-197.
  728. Caivano, José Luis 1990. Visual texture as a semiotic system. Semiotica 80(3/4): 239-252.
  729. Charteris, J. and P. A. Scott 1993. Structuring the domain of human nonverbal behavior: A biological, Popperian perspective from the field of human movement studies. Semiotica 95(3/4) 205-234.
  730. Chomsky, Noam 1979. Human Language and Other Semiotic Systems. Semiotica 25(1/2): 31-44.
  731. Chvatík, Květoslav 1981. Semiotics of a literary work of art. Dedicated to the 90th birthday of Jan Mukařovský (1891-1975). Semiotica 37(3/4): 193-214.
  732. Cook, Mark and Mansur G. Lalljee 1972. Verbal Substitutes for Visual Signs in Interaction. Semiotica 6(3): 212-221.
  733. Csányi, Vilmos 2000. The 'human behavior complex' and the compulsion of communication: Key factors of human evolution. Semiotica 128(3/4): 243-258.
  734. Danow, David K. 1984. Lotman and Uspensky: A perfusion of models. Semiotica 64(3/4): 343-357.
  735. Davidsen, Helle M. 2007. Literary semiotics and cognitive semantics. Semiotica 165(1/4): 337-349.
  736. Wills, Dorothy Davis 1986. Not in so many words. Semiotica 58(3/4): 343-369.
  737. Drechsler, Wolfgang 2009. Political semiotics. Semiotica 173(1/4): 73-97.
  738. Esposito, Joseph L. 1984. Peirce's speculations on the conditions of representability. Semiotica 49(1/2): 7-13.
  739. Evdoridou, Elissavet 2008. Multiscale textual semiotic analysis. Semiotica 171(1/4): 251-264.
  740. Fiordo, Richard 1989. Hypersemiotic and hyposemiotic communication: More ado about nothing? Semiotica 77(4): 461-479.
  741. France, Malcolm N. and Alexander M. Piatigorsky 1976. The existential function of some symbols. Semiotica 16(2): 141-158.
  742. Gilani, Zulfigar H., Wilma Bucci and Norbert Freedman 1985. The structure and language of a silence. Semiotica 56(1/2): 99-113.
  743. Goldschläger, Alain 1985. On ideological discourse. Semiotica 54(1/2): 165-176.
  744. Gorlée, Dinda L. 2007. Vital signs of semio-translation. Semiotica 163(1/4): 159-161.
  745. Ègorov, Boris F. 1974. Simplest Semiotic Systems and Plot Typology. Semiotica 10(2): 131-141.
  746. Grossberg, Lawrence 1982. Experience, signification, and reality: The boundaries of cultural semiotics. Semiotica 41(1/4): 73-106.
  747. Hak, Tony 1989. Developing a text-sociological analysis. Semiotica 75(1/2): 25-42.
  748. Hayashi, Makoto 2005. Joint turn construction through language and the body: Notes on embodiment in coordinated participation in situated activities. Semiotica 156(1/4): 21-53.
  749. Heusden, Barend van 2007. Semiosis, art, and literature. Semiotica 165(1/4): 133-147.
  750. Hoppál, Mihály 1987. Proxemic patterns, social structures, and world view. Semiotica 65(3/4): 225-247.
  751. Innis, Robert E. 2007. The making of the literary symbol: Taking note of Langer. Semiotica 165(1/4): 91-106.
  752. Jestrović, Vilvija 2008. Semiotics of nonsemiotic performance. Semiotica 168(1/4): 93-107.
  753. Kirk, Lorraine and Michael Burton 1976. Physical versus semantic classification of nonverbal forms: A cross-cultural experiment. Semiotica 17(4): 315-337.
  754. Koneya, Mele 1981. Unresolved theoretical issues in nonverbal communication. Semiotica 37(1/2): 1-14.
  755. Kuzar, Ron 2011. The subversive agent: Anatomy of personal ideological change. Semiotica 185(1/4): 223-234.
  756. Lanigan, Richard L. 1979. A Semiotic Metatheory of Human Communication. Semiotica 27(4): 293-305.
  757. Lepik, Peeter 2002. The anticulture phenomenon in Soviet culture. Semiotica 138(1/4): 179-203.
  758. Lindenfeld, Jacqueline 1971. Verbal and Non-Verbal Elements in Discourse. Semiotica 3(3): 223-233.
  759. Lotman, Juri M. 1975. Notes on the structure of a literary text. Semiotica 15(3): 199-205.
  760. Low, David 2008. Dissent and environmental communication: A semiotic approach. Semiotica 172(1/4): 47-64.
  761. Mandoki, Katya 2004. Power and semiosis. Semiotica 151(1/4): 97-114.
  762. Marling, William 1994. The formal ideologeme. Semiotica 98(3/4): 277-299.
  763. Meerzon, Yana 2005. Body and space: Michael Chekhov's notion of atmosphere as the means of creating space in theatre. Semiotica 155(1/4): 259-279.
  764. Nadal, José María 1990. Enunciation and narration: World and text. Semiotica 81(3/4): 357-384.
  765. Ning, Wang 2008. From linguistic semiotics to cultural semioticS: Semiotic and narrative studies in China. Semiotica 170(1/4): 139-151.
  766. Noakes, Susan 1987. Dante and Orwell: The antithetical hypersign as hallmark in literature and politics. Semiotica 63(1/2): 149-161.
  767. Poyatos, Fernando 1977. Forms and Functions of Nonverbal Communication in the novel: A New Perspective of the Author-Character-Reader Relationship. Semiotica 21(3/4): 295-337.
  768. Poyatos, Fernando 1980. Interactive functions and limitations of verbal and nonverbal behaviors in natural conversation. Semiotica 30(3/4): 211-244.
  769. Rewar, Walter 1989. On hierarchy, extension, and boundary in the cybernetic modeling of the literary text. Semiotica 75(3/4): 229-255.
  770. Scollon, Ron 1998. Reading as social interaction: The empirical grounding of reading. Semiotica 118(3/4): 281-294.
  771. Seaford, Henry W. Jr. 1978. Maximizing Replicability in Describing Facial Behavior. Semiotica 24(1/2): 1-32.
  772. Selg, Peeter and Andreas Ventsel 2010. An outline for a semiotic theory of hegemony. Semiotica 182(1/4): 443-474.
  773. Siefkes, Martin 2010. Power in society, economy, and mentality: Towards a semiotic theory of power. Semiotica 181(1/4): 225-261.
  774. Staiano-Ross, Kathryn 2005. Losing myself: Body as icon/body as object(s). Semiotica 154(1/4): 57-94.
  775. Tantam, Digby 1986. A semiotic model of nonverbal communication. Semiotica 58(1/2): 41-57.
  776. Vaina, Lucia 1980. Fuzzy sets in the semiotic of text. Semiotica 31(3/4): 261-272.
  777. van Poecke, Luc 1988. Denotation/connotation and verbal/nonverbal communication. Semiotica 71(1/2): 125-151.
  778. Veivo, Harri 2007. The new literary semiotics. Semiotica 165(1/4): 41-55.
  779. Veron, Eliseo 1971. Ideology and Social Sciences: A Communicational Approach. Semiotica 3(1): 59-76.
  780. Vávra, Vlastimil 1977. The Self and Body Movement Behavior. Semiotica 21(1/2): 1-22.
  781. Winner, Irene Portis 1983. Some comments on the concept of the human sign: Visual and verbal components, and applications to ethnic research (A wonderful father). Semiotica 46(2/4): 263-285.
  782. Young, Katharine 2000. Gestures and the phenomenology of emotion in narrative. Semiotica 131(1/2): 79-112.
  783. Viirpalu, Iiris 2012. Liikumine ja ruumikasutus Aleksander Pepeljajevi lavastuses "Margarita ja meister". Seminaritöö. Juhendaja: Katre Väli. Tartu Ülikool; Filosoofia teaduskond; Semiootika osakond.
  784. Ogden, C. Kay and Ivor A. Richards 1946[1923]. The Meaning of Meaning: A Study of the Influence of Language upon Thought and of the Science of Symbolism. Eighth edition. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, Inc.
  785. Deledalle, Gérard 2000. Charles S. Peirce's Philosophy of Signs: Essays in Comparative Semiotics. Bloomington; Indianapolis: Indiana University Press.
  786. Kockelman, Paul 2011. Biosemiosis, Technocognition, and Sociogenesis: Selection and Significance in a Multiverse of Sieving and Serendipity. Current Anthropology 52(5): 711-739.
  787. Elyachar, Julia 2010. Phatic labor, infrastructure, and the question of empowerment in Cairo. American Ethnologist 37(3): 452-464.
  788. Corneli, Joseph A. 2014. Peer Produced Peer Learning: A Mathemathical Case Study. PhD thesis. Milton Keynes, The Open University.
  789. Lanigan, Richard L. 1991. Roman Jakobson's Semiotic Theory of Communication. Revised version of a paper presented at the Annual Meeting of the Speech Communication Association (77th, Atlanta, GA, October 31 - November 3, 1991).
  790. Innis, Robert E. 1988. The thread of subjectivity: philosophical remarks on Bühler's language theory. In: Eschbach, Achim (ed.), Karl Bühler's theory of languages: Proceedings of the Conferences Held at Kirchberg, August 26, 1984 and Essen, November 21-24, 1984. Amsterdam: John Benjamins Publishing, 77-106.
  791. Ogden, Charles K. and Ivor A. Richards 1946[1923]. The Meaning of Meaning: A Study of the Influence of Language upon Thought and of the Science of Symbolism. Eighth edition. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, Inc.
  792. Malinowski, Bronislaw 1946[1923]. The Problem of Meaning in Primitive Languages. In: Ogden, C. K. & I. A. Richards, The Meaning of Meaning: A Study of the Influence of Language upon Thought and of the Science of Symbolism. Eighth edition. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, Inc., 296-336.
  793. Bühler, Karl 2011[1934]. Theory of Language: The representational function of language. Translated by Donald Fraser Goodwin in collaboration with Achim Eschbach. Amsterdam; Philadelphia: John Benjamins Publishing Company.
  794. Nord, Christiane 2007. The Phatic Function in Translation: Metacommunication as a Case in Point. Belgian Journal of Linguistics 21(1): 171-184.
  795. Kulkarni, Dipti 2014. Exploring Jakobson's 'phatic function' in instant messaging interactions. Discourse & Communication 8(2): 117-136.
  796. Gfaller, Georg R. 1993. 'Figuration': The Contribution of Norbert Elias to Group Analysis and the Contribution of Group Analysis to the Social Sciences. Group Analysis 26(3): 341-356.
  797. Elias, Norbert 2013[1970]. Mis on sotsioloogia? Tlk Katrin Kaugver; toim. Sirje Laidre; eessõna Mikko Lagerspetz; kujundanud Sirje Ratso. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus.
  798. Elias, Norbert 1978[1970]. What is Sociology? New York: Columbia University Press.
  799. Lotman, Juri 2000[1969]. Inimesed ja märgid. Vikerkaar 1. [Sovetskaja Estonija 27].
  800. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1968b]. Psychotherapy in the Computer Age. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 763-777.
  801. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1965]. Psychotherapy for the Well and Psychotherapy for the Ill. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 749-762.
  802. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1955b]. Transference Reformulated. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 739-748.
  803. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1955a]. Nonverbal Language and Therapy. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 727-738.
  804. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1953c]. Social Factors in Therapy: A Brief Review. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 688-726.
  805. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1956c]. Psychotherapy and Communication. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 679-687.
  806. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1952]. The Therapeutic Process from the Point of View of Communication Theory. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 667-678.
  807. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1959b]. Psychotherapy with Schizophrenics. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 648-661.
  808. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1959a]. The Schizophrenic Patient's Ways of Communication. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 635-647.
  809. Ruesch, Jurgen and A. Rodney Prestwood 1972[1950b]. Communication and Bodily Disease: A Stody of Vasospastic Conditions. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 614-634.
  810. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1953b]. The Interpersonal Communication of Anxiety. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 604-613.
  811. Ruesch, Jurgen and A. Rodney Prestwood 1972[1949]. Anxiety: Its Initiation, Communication, and Interpersonal Management. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 577-603.
  812. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1962]. Human Communication and the Psychiatrist. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 560-571.
  813. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1948b]. The Infantile Personality: The Core Problem of Psychosomatic Medicine. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 540-559.
  814. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1961]. Psychosomatic Medicine and the Behavioral Sciences. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 526-539.
  815. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1951]. Part and Whole: The Sociopsychological and Psychosomatic Approach to Disease. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 503-525.
  816. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1964]. Clinical Science and Communication Theory. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 486-502.
  817. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1968a]. Psychoanalysis between Two Cultures. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 466-482.
  818. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1969b]. A General Systems Theory Based on Human Communication. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 450-465.
  819. Ruesch, Jurgen and Gregory Bateson 1972[1949]. Structure and Process in Social Relations. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 417-449.
  820. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1969a]. Action Models. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 393-412.
  821. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1956b]. Communication Difficulties among Psychiatrists. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 378-392.
  822. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1956a]. Creation of a Multidisciplinary team. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 365-377.
  823. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1958]. The Tangential Response. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 354-365.
  824. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1960]. Mass Communication and Mass Motivation. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 345-353.
  825. Ruesch, Jurgen and A. Rodney Prestwood 1972[1950a]. Interaction Process and Personal Codification. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 305-344.
  826. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972d. Introduction. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 303-304.
  827. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1967c]. The Social Control of Symbolic Systems. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 177-300.
  828. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1967b]. Technology and Social Communication. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 160-176.
  829. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1967a]. Technological Civilization and Human Affairs. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 242-259.
  830. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1963]. The Healing Traditions. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 227-241.
  831. Ruesch, Jurgen; Annemarie Jacobson and Martin B. Loeb 1972[1948b]. Acculturation and Illness. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 173-226.
  832. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1948a]. Social Technique, Social Status, and Social Change in Illness. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 158-172.
  833. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1957b]. Values and the Process of Communication. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 143-157.
  834. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1957a]. Principles of Human Communication. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 125-137.
  835. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1954]. Psychiatry and the Challenge of Communication. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 95-124.
  836. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1953a]. Synopsis of the Theory of Human Communication. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 47-94.
  837. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1966]. Social Process. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 21-46.
  838. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972b. Introduction. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 19-20.
  839. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972a. Introduction. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 11-15.
  840. Jakobson, Roman 1979[1937f]. The Statue in Puškin's Poetic Mythology. In: Rudy, Stephen and Martha Taylor (eds.), Selected Writings IV: On Verse, Its Masters and Explorers. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 237-280.
  841. Jakobson, Roman 1979[1936c]. Metrics. In: Rudy, Stephen and Martha Taylor (eds.), Selected Writings IV: On Verse, Its Masters and Explorers. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 147-159.
  842. Jakobson, Roman 1979[1926b]. Afterword of 1926. In: Rudy, Stephen and Martha Taylor (eds.), Selected Writings IV: On Verse, Its Masters and Explorers. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 122-130.
  843. Jakobson, Roman 1981j. Retrospect. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 765-789.
  844. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1971d]. The Dominant. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 751-756.
  845. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1934a]. What is Poetry?. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 740-750.
  846. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1933b]. Is the Film in Decline?. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 732-739.
  847. Jakobson, Roman and Bayara Aroutunova 1981[1972a]. An Unknown Album Page by Nikolaj Gogol'. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 679-695.
  848. Jakobson, Roman and Stephen Rudy 1981[1977b]. Yeats' "Sorrow of Love" through the Years. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 600-638.
  849. Jakobson, Roman and Peter Colaclides 1981[1966k]. Grammatical Imagery in Cavafy's Poem ΘΥΜΗΣΟΥ, ΣΩΜΙΑ... In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 582-590.
  850. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1964f]. The Grammatical Structure of Janko Král's Verses. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 482-498.
  851. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1970h]. On the Verbal Art of William Blake on Other Poet-Painters. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 322-344.
  852. Jakobson, Roman and Lawrence G. Jones 1981[1970g]. Shakespeare's Verbal Art in "Th'Expence of Spirit". In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 284-303.
  853. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1966h]. The Grammatical Texture of a Sonnet from Sir Philip Sidney's Arcadia. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 275-283.
  854. Jakobson, Roman and Paolo Valesio 1981[1966g]. Vocabularum constructio in Dante's Sonnet "Se vedi li occhi miei". In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 176-192.
  855. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1970f]. Martin's Codax's Poetic Texture: A Revised Version of a Letter to Haroldo de Campos. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 169-175.
  856. Jakobson, Roman 1981a. Notes on the Contours of an Ancient Japanese Poem: the Farewell Poem of 732 by Takapasi Musimarö. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 157-164.
  857. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1970e]. Subliminal Verbal Patterning in Poetry. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 136-147.
  858. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1966f]. Grammatical Parallelism and its Russian Facet. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 98-135.
  859. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1968c]. Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 87-97.
  860. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1964e]. Language in Operation. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 7-17.
  861. Jakobson, Roman and Jurij Tynjanov 1981[1928d]. Problems in the Study of Language and Literature. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris; New York: Mouton, 3-6.
  862. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1970d]. Language in Relation to Other Communication Systems. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 697-708.
  863. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1956d]. Sergej Karcevskij: August 28, 1884 - November 7, 1955. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 517-521.
  864. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1959b]. On Linguistic Aspects of Translation. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 260-266.
  865. Jakobson, Roman 1971d. Retrospect. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 711-724.
  866. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1969c]. Linguistics in Relation to Other Sciences. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 655-696.
  867. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1964d]. Results of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 593-602.
  868. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1960b]. The Kazan's School of Polish Linguistics and Its Place in the International Development of Phonology. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 394-428.
  869. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1964b]. Toward a Linguistic Classification of Aphasic Impairments. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 690-692.
  870. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1963c]. Parts and Wholes in Language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 280-284.
  871. Parsons, Talcott and Robert F. Bales 1955. Family, Socialization and Interaction Process. In collaboration with James OLds, Morris Zelditch, Jr. and Philip E. Slater. Glencoe, Illinois: The Free Press.
  872. Bateson, Gregory 1951a. Information and Codification: A Philosophical Approach. In: Ruesch, Jurgen and Gregory Bateson, Communication: The Social Matrix of Psychiatry. New York: Norton, 168-211.
  873. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1956b]. Two Aspects of Language and Two Types of Aphasic Disturbances. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 239-259.
  874. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1963e]. Implications of Language Universals for Linguistics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 580-592.
  875. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1966c]. Linguistic Types of Aphasia. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 307-333.
  876. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1961b]. Linguistics and Communication Theory. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 570-579.
  877. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1953d]. Results of a Joint Conference of Anthropologists and Linguists. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 554-567.
  878. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1955a]. Aphasia as a Linguistic Topic. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 229-238.
  879. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1957c]. Shifters, Verbal Categories, and the Russian Verb. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 130-147.
  880. Jakobson, Roman 1962c. Retrospect. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 629-659.
  881. Jakobson, Roman 1962[1928c]. On the Elimination of Long Consonants in Czech. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 626-628.
  882. Jakobson, Roman 1962[1926a]. Contributions to the Study of Czech Accent. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 614-625.
  883. Jakobson, Roman and Morris Halle 1962[1956a]. Phonology and Phonetics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 465-504.
  884. Jakobson, Roman; Colin E. Cherry and Morris Halle 1962[1953a]. Toward the Logical Description of Languages in their Phonemic Aspects. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. s-Gravenhage: Mouton, 449-463.
  885. Courtney, E. 1988. Problems in the Silvae of Statius. Classical Philology 83(1): 43-45.
  886. Hill, H. 1938. Equites and Celeres. Classical Philology 33(3): 283-290.
  887. Laidlaw, W. A. 1939. S.V.B.E. Classical Philology 34(3): 251-252.
  888. Boyd, Barbara Weiden 2000. "Celabitor Auctor": The Crisis of Authority and Narrative Patterning in Ovid "Fasti" 5. Phoenix 54(1): 64-98.
  889. McDermott, William C. 1970. The Sisters of P. Clodius. Phoenix 24(1): 39-47.
  890. Posner, Roland 2004. Basics Tasks of Cultural Semiotics. In: Withalm, Gloria and Josef Wallmannsberger (eds.), Signs of Power - Power of Signs. Essays in Honor of Jeff Bernard. Vienna: INST, 56-89.
  891. Randviir, Anti 2013. Autocommunication in semiotic systems: 40 years after the Theses on the Semiotic Study of Cultures (Tartu Summer School in Semiotics 2013). Sign Systems Studies 41(2): 378-382.
  892. Barooshian, Vahan D. 1971. Russian Futurism in the Late 1920's: Literature of Fact. The Slavic and East European Journal 15(1): 38-46.
  893. Lawton, Anna 1976. Russian and Italian Futurist Manifestoes. The Slavic and East European Journal 20(4): 405-420.
  894. Kiryushchenko, Vitali 2012. Peirce's semiotics and Russian formalism: The story of Oedipus Rex. Semiotica 189(1): 255-269.
  895. Tihanov, Galin 2007. Gustav Shpet's Literary and Theatre Theory. CLCWeb: Comparative Literature and Culture 9(4): Article 3.
  896. Sus, Oleg 1972. On the genetic preconditions of Czech structuralist semiology and semantics. An essay on Czech and German thought. Poetics 1(4): 28-54.
  897. Mandelker, Amy 1983. Russian Formalism and the Objective Analysis of Sound in Poetry. The Slavic and East European Journal 27(3): 327-338.
  898. Edmunds, Lowell 2003. Roman Jakobson and Mac Hammond. ANQ: A Quarterly Journal of Short Articles, Notes and Reviews 16(3): 46-48.
  899. Tihanov, Galin 2004. Why Did Modern Literary Theory Originate In Central And Eastern Europe? (And Why Is It Now Dead?). Common Knowledge 10(1): 61-81.
  900. Ewald, Oscar 1913. German Philosophy in 1912. Translated by E. Jordan. The Philosophical Review 22(5): 484-501.
  901. Väljataga, Märt 2014. Kirjandus kui mehhanism ja süsteem ehk sada aastat vene formalismi. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 339-365.
  902. Tomaševski, Boriss 2014c[1928]. Uus kirjandusajaloo koolkond Venemaal. Tlk Heli Allik. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 285-300.
  903. Eichenbaum, Boriss 2014c[1926]. "Vormimeetodi" teooria. Tlk Kajar PRuul. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 246-284.
  904. Jakobson, Roman 2014[1935/1978]. Dominant. Tlk Mart Väljataga. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 240-245.
  905. Tõnjanov, Juri ja Roman Jakobson 2014[1928]. Kirjanduse ja keele uurimise probleemid. Tlk Mart Väljataga. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 237-239.
  906. Tõnjanov, Juri 2014[1927]. Kirjanduse evolutsioonist. Tlk Mart Väljataga. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 220-234.
  907. Tõnjanov, Juri 2014[1924]. Kirjandusfakt. Tlk Kajar Pruul. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 199-219.
  908. Eichenbaum, Boriss 2014b[1927]. Kirjanduselu. Tlk Mart Väljataga. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 189-198.
  909. Tomaševski, Boriss 2014[1923]. Kirjandus ja biograafia. Tlk Mart Väljataga. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 179-188.
  910. Tomaševski, Boriss 2014[1925]. Temaatika. Süžeekonstruktsioon. Tlk Mart Väljataga. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 141-174.
  911. Propp, Vladimir 2014[1928]. Imemuinasjuttude transformatsioonid. Tlk Aare Pilv. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 116-140.
  912. Šklovski, Viktor 2014[1919]. Süžeeloome võtete seos üldiste stiilivõtetega. Tlk Jaan Ross. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 71-115.
  913. Eichenbaum, Boriss 2014a[1919]. Kuidas on tehtud Gogoli "Sinel". Tlk Kajar Pruul. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 51-71.
  914. Brik, Ossip 2014[1923]. Nn "vormimeetod". Tlk Mart Väljataga. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 46-48.
  915. Jakobson, Roman 2014[1921]. Realismist kunstis. Tlk Mart Väljataga. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 36-45.
  916. Šklovski, Viktor 2014[1917]. Kunst kui võte. Tlk Boris Kabur. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 17-35.
  917. Šklovski, Viktor 2014[1914]. Sõna elluärkamine. Tlk Mart Väljataga. In: Väljataga, Märt (toim.), Kirjandus kui selline: Valik Vene vormikoolkonna tekste. Gigantum Humeris. Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus, 9-16.
  918. Winner, Thomas G. 1979. Some Fundamental Concepts Leading to a Semiotics of Culture: An Historical Overview. Semiotica 27(1-3): 75-82.
  919. Winner, Irene Portis and Thomas G. Winner 1976. The Semiotics of Cultural Texts. Semiotica 18(2): 101-156.
  920. Lotman, Juri M. and Boris A. Uspenskij 2013[1979]. Heterogeneity and homogeneity of cultures: Postscriptum to the collective theses. In: Salupere, Silvi; Peeter Torop and Kalevi Kull (eds.), Beginnings of the semiotics of culture. Tartu Semiotics Library 13. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 129-132.
  921. Lotman, Juri M.; Vjacheslav V. Ivanov; Aleksandr M. Pjatigorskj; Vladimir N. Toporov and Boris A. Uspenskij 2013[1973]. Theses on the semiotic study of cultures (as applied to Slavic texts). In: Salupere, Silvi; Peeter Torop and Kalevi Kull (eds.), Beginnings of the semiotics of culture. Tartu Semiotics Library 13. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 53-77.
  922. Lotman, Juri M. 2013[1970]. Proposals for the programme of the 4th Summer school on secondary modelling systems. In: Salupere, Silvi; Peeter Torop and Kalevi Kull (eds.), Beginnings of the semiotics of culture. Tartu Semiotics Library 13. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 41-43.
  923. Salupere, Silvi and Peeter Torop 2013. Introduction: On the Beginnings of the semiotics of culture in the light of the Theses of the Tartu-Moscow School. In: Salupere, Silvi; Peeter Torop and Kalevi Kull (eds.), Beginnings of the semiotics of culture. Tartu Semiotics Library 13. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 15-37.
  924. Salupere, Silvi; Peeter Torop and Kalevi Kull 2013. Preface. In: Salupere, Silvi; Peeter Torop and Kalevi Kull (eds.), Beginnings of the semiotics of culture. Tartu Semiotics Library 13. Tartu: University of Tartu Press, 5-10.
  925. Lynch, Kevin 1970[1960]. The Image of the City. Cambridge; London: The MIT Press.
  926. Lotman, Juri M. 1999. Semiosfäärist. Koostanud ja tõlkinud Kajar Pruul. Tallinn: Vagabund.
  927. Lagopoulos, Alexandros Ph. 1993. From the stick to the region: Space as a social instrument of semiosis. Semiotica 96(1/2): 87-138.
  928. Nerman, Robert 1991. Kõdurajooni filosoofia. Akadeemia 6: 1277-1290.
  929. Donskis, Leonidas 1991. Lewis Mumford linnakultuurist ja selle saatusest. Tõlkinud Eva Kont. Akadeemia 6: 1257-1276.
  930. Shotland, R. Lance and Michael P. Johnson 1978. Bystander behavior and kinesics: The interaction between the helper and victim. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(3): 181-190.
  931. Rozelle, Richard M. and James C. Baxter 1978. The interpretation of nonverbal behavior in a role-defined interaction sequence: The police-citizen encounter. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(3): 167-180.
  932. Baum, Andrew; Karen Mapp and Glenn E. Davis 1978. Determinants of residential group development and social control. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(3): 145-160.
  933. Patterson, Arthur H. 1978. Territorial behavior and fear of crime in the elderly. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(3): 131-144.
  934. Gottdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos 1986b. Glossary. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 323-327.
  935. Boudon, Pierre 1986b[1978]. Re-writing of a City: The Medina of Tunis. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 303-321.
  936. Gottdiener, M. 1986b. Recapturing the Center: A Semiotic Analysis of Shopping Malls. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 288-302.
  937. Lagopoulos, Alexandros Ph. 1986b[1975]. Semiological Urbanism: An Analysis of the Traditional Western Sudanese Settlement. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 259-287.
  938. Choay, Françoise 1986b[1965]. Urbanism in question. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 241-258.
  939. Russell, James A. and Albert Mehrabian 1977. Environmental Effects on Drug Use. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(2): 109-123.
  940. Maines, David R. 1977. Tactile relationships in the subway as affected by racial, sexual, and crowded seating situations. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(2): 100-108.
  941. Elman, Donald, Duane C. Schulte and Allen Bukoff 1977. Effects of facial expression and stare duration on walking speed: Two field experiments. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(2): 93-99.
  942. Berglund, Birgitta, Ulf Berglund, Erland Jonsson and Thomas Lindvall 1977. On the scaling of annoyance due to environmental factors. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(2): 83-92.
  943. Sundstrom, Eric and Mary Graehl Sundstrom 1977. Personal space invasions: What happens when the invader asks permission? Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(2): 76-82.
  944. Ginsburg, Harvey J., Vicki A. Pollman, Mitzi S. Wauson and Marti L. Hope 1977. Variation of aggressive interaction among male elementary school children as a function of changes in spatial density. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(2): 67-75.
  945. Ledrut, Raymond 1986b[1973]. The Images of the City. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 219-240.
  946. Gottdiener, M. 1986a. Culture, Ideology, and the Sign of the City. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 202-218.
  947. Lagopoulos, Alexandros Ph. 1986a[1983]. Semiotic Urban Models and Modes of Production: A Socio-Semiotic Approach. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 176-201.
  948. Choay, Françoise 1986a[1969]. Urbanism and Semiology. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 160-175.
  949. Fauque, Richard 1986[1973]. For a New Semiological Approach to the City. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 137-159.
  950. Ledrut, Raymond 1986a[1973]. Speech and the Silence of the City. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 114-134.
  951. Woolfolk, Robert L., Anita E. Woolfolk and Karen S. Garlinsky 1977. Nonverbal behavior of teachers: Some empirical findings. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(1): 45-61.
  952. Firestone, Ira J. 1977. Reconciling verbal and nonverbal models of dyadic communication. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(1): 30-44.
  953. Patterson, Miles L. 1977. Tape-recorded cuing for time-sampled observations of nonverbal behavior. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(1): 26-29.
  954. O'Neal, Edgar, Christine Caldwell and Gordon G. Gallup 1977. Territorial invasion and aggression in young children. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(1): 14-25.
  955. Miller, Stuart and Kathleen M. Nardini 1977. Individual differences in the perception of crowding. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 2(1): 3-13.
  956. Boudon, Pierre 1986a[1977]. Introduction to the Semiotics of Space. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 99-113.
  957. Barthes, Roland 1986[1970-71]. Semiology and the Urban. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 87-98.
  958. Eco, Umberto 1986[1968]. Function and Sign: Semiotics of Architecture. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 55-86.
  959. Greimas, Algirdas Julien 1986[1972]. For a Topological Semiotics. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 25-54.
  960. Gottdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos 1986. Introduction. In: Gotdiener, M. and Alexander Ph. Lagopoulos (eds.), The City and the Sign: An Introduction to Urban Semiotics. New York: Colubia University Press, 1-22.
  961. Aiello, John R. 1977. A further look at equilibrium theory: Visual interaction as a function of interpersonal distance. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 1(2): 122-140.
  962. Kaplan, Kalman J. 1977. Structure and process in interpersonal "distancing". Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 1(2): 104-121.
  963. Mehrabian, Albert 1977. A questionnaire measure of individual differences in stimulus screening and associated differences in arousability. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 1(2): 89-103.
  964. Schopler, John and Janet E. Stockdale 1977. An interference analysis of crowding. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 1(2): 81-88.
  965. Lotman, Juri M. 2007. Hirm ja segadus: Esseid kultuurisemiootikast. Koostanud Mihhail Lotman; Tõlkinud Kajar Pruul. Tallinn: Varrak.
  966. Ekman, Paul and Wallace V. Friesen 1976. Measuring facial movement. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 1(1): 56-75.
  967. McCauley, Clark and James Taylor 1976. Is there overload of acquaintances in the city?. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 1(1): 41-55.
  968. Karlin, Robert A., Dianne McFarland, John R. Aiello and Yakov M. Epstein 1976. Normative mediation of reactions to crowding. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 1(1): 30-40.
  969. Kaplan, Kalman J. and Carl I. Greenberg 1976. Regulation of interaction through architecture, travel, and telecommunication: A distance-equilibrium approach to environmental planning. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 1(1): 17-29.
  970. Argyle, Michael and Jean Ann Graham 1976. The central Europe experiment: Looking at persons and looking at objects. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 1(1): 6-16.
  971. Lee, Randolph M. 1976. Editorial. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 1(1): 3-5.
  972. Schacter, Daniel L., Paul L. Wang, Endel Tulving and Morris Freedman 1982. Functional Retrograde Amnesia: A Quatitative Case Study. Neuropsychologia 30(5): 523-532.
  973. Chisholm, Roderick M. 1981. Brentano's Analysis of the Consciousness of Time. Midwest Studies in Philosophy 6(1): 3-16.
  974. Larrabee, M. J. 1993. Inside time-consciousness: Diagramming the flux. Husserl Studies 10(3): 181-210.
  975. Mukařovský, Jan 1964[1940]. The Esthetics of Language. In: Garvin, Paul L. (ed.), The Prague School Reader oy Esthetics, Literary Structures, and Style, Selected and Translated from the Original Czech. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press, 31-69.
  976. Mukařovský, Jan 1976[1944]. The Essence of the Visual Arts. In: Matejka, Ladislav and Irwin R. Titunik (eds.), Semiotics of Art: Prague School contributions. Cambridge: MIT Press, 229-244.
  977. Mukařovský, Jan 1964[1932]. Standard Language and Poetic Language. In: Garvin, Paul L. (ed.), The Prague School Reader oy Esthetics, Literary Structures, and Style, Selected and Translated from the Original Czech. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press, 17-30.
  978. Mukařovský, Jan 1976[1938]. Poetic Reference. In: Matejka, Ladislav and Irwin R. Titunik (eds.), Semiotics of Art: Prague School contributions. Cambridge: MIT Press, 155-163.
  979. Mukařovský, Jan 1976[1936]. Art as Semiotic Fact. In: Matejka, Ladislav and Irwin R. Titunik (eds.), Semiotics of Art: Prague School contributions. Cambridge: MIT Press, 3-9.
  980. Gandelman, Claude 1988. The Dialectical Functioning of Mukařovský's Semiotic Model. In: Tobin, Yishai (ed.), The Prague School and It's Legacy: In Linguistics, Literature, Semiotics, Folklore, and the Arts. Amsterdam: John Benjamins Publishing Company, 265-273.
  981. Eco, Umberto 1987. The Influence of Roman Jakobson on the Development of Semiotics. In: Krampen, Martin et al. (eds.), Classics of Semiotics. New York: Plenum Press, 109-127.
  982. Waugh, Linda R. and Monique Monville-Burston 2002[1990]. Introduction to Roman Jakobson, Selected Writings. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Third edition. Introduction by Linda R. Waugh & Monique Monville-Burston. Berlin; New York: Mouton, v-lxiii.
  983. Jakobson, Roman and Linda R. Waugh 1987[1979]. Excerpts from The Sound Shape of Language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VIII: Major Works 1976-1980. Completion Volume 1. Berlin; New York: Mouton, 1-315.
  984. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1982]. On the Dialectics of Language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 377-378.
  985. Jakobson, Roman 2002[1959]. Why "Mama" and "Papa"? In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings I: Phonological Studies. Third edition. Introduction by Linda R. Waugh & Monique Monville-Burston. Berlin; New York: Mouton, 538-545.
  986. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1950]. Slavic Gods and Demons. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 3-9.
  987. Jakobson, Roman 1987[1959]. Sign and System of Language: A Reassessment of Saussure's Doctrine. In: Krystyna Pomorska & Stephen Rudy (eds.), Language in Literature. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 28-33.
  988. Jakobson, Roman 1987[1935]. The Dominant. In: Krystyna Pomorska & Stephen Rudy (eds.), Language in Literature. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 41-46.
  989. Gorp, Hendrik Van 2004. Translation and comparable transfer operations. In: Harald Kittel et al. (eds), Übersetzung: Ein Internationales Handbuch Zur Übersetzungsforschung; An International Encyclopedia of Translation Studies. Berlin: Gruyter, 62-68.
  990. Zilberman, David B. & Robert S. Cohen 1988. Understanding Cultural Traditions Through Types of Thinking. Boston Studies in the Philosophy of Science 102: 299-329.
  991. Eco, Umberto 1997. Reis hüperreaalsusse. Tõlkinud Joel Sang. Tallinn: Vagabund.
  992. Geertz, Clifford 1983. Local knowledge: Further essays in interpretive anthropology. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books.
  993. Mamardašvili, Merab K. ja Aleksander M. Pjatigorski [1997]. Sümbol ja teadvus. Tõlkinud Silvi Salupere.
  994. Torop, Peeter 2000. Tõlge ja/kui retseptsioon. In: Kultuurimärgid. Tartu: Ilmamaa, 16-26.
  995. Jakobson, Roman 2010[1959]. Tõlkimise keelelistest aspektidest. Tõlkinud Elin Sütiste. Acta Semiotica Estica VII: 299-306.
  996. Holmes, James S. 1988. Forms of Verse Translation and the Translation of Verse Form. In: Translated!: Papers on Literary Translation and Translation Studies. Amsterdam: Rodopi, 23-33.
  997. Delabastita, Dirk 1993. There's a Double Tongue: An investigation into the translation of Shakespeare's wordplay, with special reference to Hamlet. Amsterdam; Atlanta: Rodopi.
  998. Griffin, Donald R. 1981. The Question of Animal Awareness: Evolutionary Continuity of Mental Experience. Revised and Enlarged Edition. New York: The Rockefeller University Press.
  999. Ingold, Tim 1988. The animal in the study of humanity. In: Tim Ingold (ed.), What is an animal?. London (etc.): Unwin Hyman, 84-99.
  1000. Mamardašvili, Merab K. ja Aleksander M. Pjatigorski [1997]. Sümbol ja teadvus. Tõlkinud Silvi Salupere.
  1001. Geertz, Clifford 1983. Local knowledge: Further essays in interpretive anthropology. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books.
  1002. Lévi-Strauss, Claude 2001[1962]. Metsik Mõtlemine. Tõlkinud Kaia Sisask. Tallinn: Vagabund.
  1003. Chalmers, David J. 1995. Facing up to the problem of consciousness. Journal of Consciousness Studies 2(3): 200-219.
  1004. Mamardašvili, Merab K. ja Aleksander M. Pjatigorski [1997]. Sümbol ja teadvus. Tõlkinud Silvi Salupere.
  1005. Mulligan, Kevin 2004. Brentano on the mind. In: Jacquette, Dale (ed.), The Cambridge companion to Brentano. Cambridge (etc.): Cambridge University Press, 66-97.
  1006. Mamardašvili, Merab K. ja Aleksander M. Pjatigorski [1997]. Sümbol ja teadvus. Tõlkinud Silvi Salupere.
  1007. Pjatigorski, Aleksandr 2010[1973]. Mõningatest semiootika teoreetilistest eeldustest. Tõlkinud Silvi Salupere. Acta Semiotica Estica VII: 307-309.
  1008. Ingold, Tim 2008. Anthropology is Not Ethnography. Proceedings of the British Academy 154: 69-92.
  1009. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1979b]. Toward the history of the Moscow Linguistic Circle. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 279-282.
  1010. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1979c]. From Aljagrov's letters. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 358-361.
  1011. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1979a]. Einstein and the science of language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 254-264.
  1012. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1975]. The grammatical buildup of child language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 141-147.
  1013. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1974]. The twentieth century in European and American linguistics Movements and continuity. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 265-278.
  1014. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1964/1965]. An example of migratory terms and institutional models On the 50th anniversary of the Moscow Linguistic Circle. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 527-538.
  1015. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1962b]. Efforts toward a means-ends model of language in interwar continental linguistics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 522-526.
  1016. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1962a]. Anthony's contribution to linguistic theory. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 284-288.
  1017. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1960]. Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 87-97.
  1018. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1932]. Is the film in decline? In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 732-739.
  1019. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1955]. One of the speculative anticipations An Old Russian treatise on the divine and human word. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 369-374.
  1020. Graffi, Giorgio 2001. 200 Years of Syntax: A critical survey. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
  1021. Hediger, Heini 1968. The Psychology and Behaviour of Animals is Zoos and Circuses. Translated by Geoffrey Sircom. New York: Dover.
  1022. Wenner, Adrian M. 1969. The Study of Animal Communication: An Overviev. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 232-243.
  1023. Wolfe, Cary 2010. What is posthumanism?. Minnesota; London: University of Minnesota Press.
  1024. Osborne, Catherine 2007. Dumb Beasts and Dead Philosophers: Humanity and the Humane in Ancient Philosophy and Literature. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
  1025. Rowlands, Mark 2013. Sartre, consciousness, and intentionality. Phenomenology and the Cognitive Sciences 12(30: 521-536.
  1026. O'Toole, Lawrence Michael and Ann Shukman (eds.), 1977. A contextual glossary of formalist terminology. In: Formalist Theory. Russian Poetics in Translation, Vol. 4. Oxford: Holdan Books.
  1027. Pomorska, Krystyna 1983[1980]. Afterword. In: Jakobson, Roman & Krystyna Pomorska, Dialogues. Translated by Christian Hubert. Cambridge: The MIT Press, 159-183.
  1028. Jakobson, Roman & Krystyna Pomorska 1983[1980]. Dialogues. Translated by Christian Hubert. Cambridge: The MIT Press.
  1029. Halle, Morris 1983[1980]. Foreword. In: Jakobson, Roman & Krystyna Pomorska, Dialogues. Translated by Christian Hubert. Cambridge: The MIT Press, vii-xii.
  1030. Mamardašvili, Merab K. ja Aleksander M. Pjatigorski [1997]. Sümbol ja teadvus. Tõlkinud Silvi Salupere.
  1031. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1980]. My favorite Topics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 371-376.
  1032. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1980]. Brain and language: Cerebral hemispheres and linguistic structure in mutual light. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 163-180.
  1033. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1978]. On the linguistic approach to the problem of consciousness and the unconscious. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 148-162.
  1034. Mamardašvili, Merab K. ja Aleksander M. Pjatigorski [1997]. Sümbol ja teadvus. Tõlkinud Silvi Salupere.
  1035. Whorf, Benjamin Lee 2010[1956]. Keel, mõtlemine ning tegelikkus. Tõlkinud Mihkel Niglas; toimetanud Urmas Sutrop. Tallinn: Pakett.
  1036. Reichard, Gladys A. 1936. Review of La mythologie primitive: Le Monde Mythique des Australiens et des Papous by Lucien Levy-Bruhl. American Anthropologist 38(2): 329-330.
  1037. Benedict, Ruth 1925. Review of Primitive Mentality by Lucien Levy-Bruhl. Journal of Social Forces 3(3): 557-558.
  1038. Lenoir, Raymond 1939. Review of L'expérience mystique et les symboles chez les primitifs by Lucien Levy-Bruhl. American Journal of Sociology 44(4): 580-582.
  1039. Ames, E. S. 1926. Review of Primitive Mentality by Lucien Levy-Bruhl. International Journal of Ethics 36(4): 429-430.
  1040. Kofoid, Charles A. 1937. Review of Primitives and the Supernatural by Lucien Levy-Bruhl. Isis 27(1): 104-105.
  1041. Wright, William Kelley 1923. Review of La mentalité primitive by Lucien Lévy-Bruhl. The Philosophical Review 32(4): 419-421.
  1042. Benedict, Ruth 1928. Review of L'âme primitive by Lucien Levy-Bruhl. The Journal of Philosophy 25(26): 717-719.
  1043. Kirkpatrick, Clifford 1936. Review of Promitives and the Supernatural by Lucien Lévy-Bruhl. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science 184: 243-244.
  1044. Lévi-Strauss, Claude 2001[1962]. Metsik Mõtlemine. Tõlkinud Kaia Sisask. Tallinn: Vagabund.
  1045. Lotman, Juri M. 2006[1994]. Vestlusi vene kultuurist: Vene aadli argielu ja traditsioonid 18. sajandil ja 19. sajandi algul. 1. Tõlkinud Kajar Pruul; toimetanud Triin Kaalep; kujundanud Endla Toots. Tallinn: Tänapäev.
  1046. Spolsky, Ellen 1996. Elaborated Knowledge: Reading Kinesis in Pictures. Poetics Today 17(2): 157-180.
  1047. Eco, Umberto 2001. Experiences in Translation. Translated by Alastair McEwen. Toronto: University of Toronto Press.
  1048. Bateson, Gregory 2000[1972]. Steps to an Ecology of Mind. Chicago; London: University of Chicago Press.
  1049. Darwin, Charles 1873. Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals. London: John Murray, Albemarle Street.
  1050. Sebeok, Thomas 1990b. "Talking" with Animals: Zoosemiotics Explained. In: Danesi, Marcel (ed.), Essays in Zoosemiotics. Toronto: Toronto Semiotic Circle, 105-113.
  1051. Sebeok, Thomas 1990a. Zoosemiotics: At the Intersection of Nature and Culture. In: Danesi, Marcel (ed.), Essays in Zoosemiotics. Toronto: Toronto Semiotic Circle, 37-47.
  1052. Burke, Peter 2006[1997]. Kultuuride kohtumine: Esseid uuest kultuuriajaloost. Tõlkinud Ainiki Väljataga. Tallinn: Varrak.
  1053. Ingold, Tim 2007. Kultuur, loodus, keskkond: Sammud eluökoloogia poole. Acta Semiotica Estica 4: 227-248.
  1054. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1960]. Poetry of grammar and grammar of poetry. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague (etc.): Mouton de Gruyter, 87-97.
  1055. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1958]. Linguistics and poetics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague (etc.): Mouton de Gruyter, 18-51.
  1056. Jakobson, Roman and J. Tynjanov 1981[1928]. Problems in the study of language and literature. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague (etc.): Mouton de Gruyter, 3-6.
  1057. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1935]. The dominant. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague (etc.): Mouton de Gruyter, 751-756.
  1058. Jakobson, Roman 1981[1933]. What is poetry? In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings III: Poetry of Grammar and Grammar of Poetry. The Hague (etc.): Mouton de Gruyter, 740-750.
  1059. Berger, Peter L. and Thomas Luckmann 1991[1966]. The Social Construction of Reality: A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books.
  1060. Shedletsky, Leonard 1988. Intrapersonal Communication Activities: Representing Experience. Paper prepared for the Annual Meeting of the Speech Communication Association (74th, New Orleans, LA, November 3-6, 1988).
  1061. Honeycutt, James M. with Kenneth S. Zagacki and Renee Edwards 1987. Intrapersonal Communication and Imagined Interactions. Paper presented at the Annual Meeting of the Speech Communication Association (73rd, Boston, MA, November 5-8, 1987).
  1062. Roberts, Charles V. 1983. The Definition and Delimitation of Intrapersonal Communication: A Physiological Perspective. Paper presented at the Annual Meeting of the Speech Communication Association (69th, Washington, DC, November 10-13, 1983).
  1063. Goldberg, Alvin and John Powers 1978. A course in intrapersonal communication. Communication Education 27(2): 169-173.
  1064. Jensen, Marvin D. 1984. Memoirs and Journals as Maps of Intrapersonal Communication. Communication Education 33: 237-242.
  1065. Jemmer, Patrick 2009. Intrapersonal Communication: the Hidden Language. European Journal of Clinical Hypnosis 9(1): 37-49.
  1066. Waugh, Patricia 2003[1984]. Metafiction: The Theory and Practice of Self-Conscious Fiction. London; New York: Routledge.
  1067. Bentley, Arthur F. 1941. The Factual Space and Time of Behavior. The Journal of Philosophy 38(18): 477-485.
  1068. Miller, David L. 1950. The Behavioral Dimension of Prediction and Meaning. Philosophy of Science 17(2): 133-141.
  1069. Bohnert, Herbert Gaylord 1945. The Semiotic Status of Commands. Philosophy of Science 12(4): 302-315.
  1070. Aranguren, José Luis L. 1974. Freedom, Symbols and Communication. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science 412: 11-20.
  1071. Alston, William P. 1956. Pragmatism and the Theory of Signs in Peirce. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 17(1): 79-88.
  1072. George, F. H. 1956. Pragmatics. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 17(2): 226-235.
  1073. Spiegelberg, Herbert 1956. Husserl's and Peirce's Phenomenologies: Coincidence on Interaction. Philosophy and Phenomenology Research 17(2): 164-185.
  1074. Kattsoff, L. O. 1948. What is Behavior? Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 9(1): 98-102.
  1075. Blyth, John. W. 1952. What is a Sign? Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 13(1): 28-41.
  1076. Demos, Raphael 1947. Review of The Meeting of East and West: An Inquiry Concerning World Understanding by F. S. C. Northrop. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 8(2): 276-280.
  1077. Farber, Marvin 1947. Review of Soviet Philosophy: A Survey of Principles by John Somerville. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 8(2): 280-283.
  1078. Kaufmann, Fritz 1957. Review of An Essay on Man: An Introduction to a Philosophy of Human Culture by Ernst Cassirer. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 8(2): 283-287.
  1079. Ducasse, C. J. 1947. Some Comments on Professor Wild's Criticisms of My Views on Semiosis. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 8(2): 234-238.
  1080. Ducasse, C. J. 1942. Some Comments on C. W. Morris's Foundation of the Theory of Signs. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 3(1): 43-52.
  1081. Wild, John 1947. An Introduction to the Phenomenology of Signs. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 8(2): 217-233.
  1082. Ducasse, C. J. 1939. Symbols, Signs, and Signals. The Journal of Symbolic Logic 4(2): 41-52.
  1083. Hering, Jean 1947. Concerning Image, Idea, and Dream. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 8(2): 188-205.
  1084. Vanderheyden, Jennifer 2004. The function of the dream and the body in Diderot's works. New York: Peter Lang.
  1085. Lotman, Juri M. 1976. The Discrete Text and the Iconic Text: Remarks on the Structure of Narrative. New Literary History 6(2): 333-338.
  1086. Whyte, L. L. 1951. Review of Philosophy in a New Key by Susanne K. Langer. The British Journal for the Philosophy of Science 2(5): 68-71.
  1087. Rader, Melvin 1957. Review of Philosophy in a New Key by Susanne K. Langer. The Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism 16(2): 269-270.
  1088. Johnson, James R. 1993. The Unknown Lnager: Philosophy from the New Key to the Trilogy of Mind. Journal of Aesthetic Education 27(1): 63-73.
  1089. Singer, Milton B. 1943. Review of Philosophy in a New Key by Susanne K. Langer. Isis 34(6): 529-530.
  1090. Reid, Louis Arnaud 1945. Review of Philosophy in a New Key by Susanne K. Langer. Mind 54(213): 73-83.
  1091. Parker, DeWitt H. 1943. Review of Philosophy in a New Key by Susanne K. Langer. The Philosophical Review 52(3): 306-307.
  1092. Garvin, Lucius 1944. Review of Philosophy in a New Key by Susanne K. Langer. Philosophy and Phenomenological Research 4(4): 565-569.
  1093. Nagel, Ernest 1943. Review of Philosophy in a New Key by Susanne K. Langer. The Journal of Philosophy 40(12): 323-329.
  1094. Langer, Susanne K. 1956[1942]. Philosophy in a New Key: A Study in the Symbolism of Reason, Rite, and Art. New York: New American Library.
  1095. Ruesch, Jurgen and Gregory Bateson 1951. Communication, the social matrix of psychiatry. New York: W. W. Norton & Co.
  1096. Hefferline, Ralph Franklin 1955. Communication theory: II. Extension to Intrapersonal Behavior. Quarterly Journal of Speech 41(4): 365-376.
  1097. Barnlund, Dean C. 1962. Toward a meaning-centered philosophy of communication. Journal of Communication 12(4): 197-211.
  1098. Platt, James H. 1955. What Do We Mean - "Communication"? Journal of Communication 5(1): 21-26.
  1099. Washburn, Donald E. 1964. Intrapersonal Communication in a Jungian Perspective. Journal of Communication 14(3): 131-135.
  1100. Barker, Larry L. and Gordon Wiseman 1966. A Model of Intrapersonal Communication. Journal of Communication 16(3): 172-179.
  1101. Macke, Frank 2008. Intrapersonal Communicology: Reflection, Reflexivity, and Relational Consciousness in Embodied Subjectivity. Atlantic Journal of Communication 16: 122-148.
  1102. Salupere, Silvi 2010. Juri Lotmani kultuuritüpoloogiad. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 151-169.
  1103. Lotman, Juri 2010[1973]. Kahest kommunikatsioonimudelist kultuuri süsteemis. Tlk Tanel Pern. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 127-148.
  1104. Lotman, Juri 2010h[1970]. Kultuuri tüpoloogilisest uurimisest. Tlk Kaidi Tamm. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 106-121.
  1105. Lotman, Juri 2010g[1970]. Tekstide tüpoloogia probleemist. Tlk Tanel Pern. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 99-105.
  1106. Lotman, Juri ja Aleksandr Pjatigorski 2010[1968]. Tekst ja Funktsioon. Tlk Silvi Salupere. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 86-98.
  1107. Lotman, Juri 2010f[1970]. Kahest kultuuri orienteerituse tüübist. Tlk Kaidi Tamm. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 72-75.
  1108. Lotman, Juri 2010e[1970]. "Kultuuri õpetamise" probleem kui tüpoloogiline karakteristik. Tlk Tanel Pern. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 60-72.
  1109. Lotman, Juri 2010d[1970]. Märgi ja märgisüsteemide probleem ja vene kultuuri tüpoloogia XI-XIX sajandil. Tlk Kaidi Tamm. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 36-60.
  1110. Lotman, Juri 2010c[1970]. Kultuur ja keel. Tlk Tanel Pern. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 30-36.
  1111. Lotman, Juri 2010b[1970]. Kultuur ja informatsioon. Tlk Tanel Pern. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 26-30.
  1112. Lotman, Juri 2010a[1970]. Sissejuhatus. Tlk Tanel Pern. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 25-26.
  1113. Torop, Peeter 2010. Tüpoloogia ja artoonika. In: Salupere, Silvi (toim.), Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus, 9-21.
  1114. Hawkes, Terence 2003[1977]. Structuralism and Semiotics. New York: Routledge.
  1115. Sebeok, Thomas A. 1991. Roman Jakobson's Teaching in America. In: Smith, Iris (ed.), American Signatures: Semiotic Inquiry and Method. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 133-143.
  1116. Rudy, Stephen and Linda R. Waugh 1998. Jakobson and Structuralism. In: Posner, Roland, Klaus Rabering and Thomas A. Sebeok (eds.), Semiotik: Ein Handbuch zu den zeichentheoretichen Grundlagen von Natur und Kultur = Semiotics: a handbook on the sign-theoretical foundations of nature and culture. Band 13.2. Berlin; New York: Walter de Gruyter, 2256–2271.
  1117. Danesi, Marcel 2004. Messages, Signs, and Meanings: A Basic Textbook in Semiotics and Communication Theory. Third Edition. Toronto: Canadian Scholars' Press Inc.
  1118. Fiske, John 1990. Introduction to Communication Studies. Second Edition. London; New York: Routledge.
  1119. Shintani, Laura 1999. Roman Jakobson and biology: 'A system of systems'. Semiotica 127(1): 103-113.
  1120. Andrews, Edna 1990. A dialogue on the sign: Can Peirce and Jakobson be reconciled? Semiotica 82(1-2): 1-13.
  1121. Vávra, Vlastimil 1976. Is Jakobson Right? Semiotica 17(2): 95-110.
  1122. Voegelin, Charles F. and Zellig S. Harris 1947. The Scope of Linguistics. American Anthropologist 49(4): 588-600.
  1123. Cassirer, Ernst A. 1945. Structuralism in Modern Linguistics. Word 1: 99-120.
  1124. Kennedy, George A. 1955. Review of Studies in Chinese Thought by Arthur F. Wright. The Far Eastern Quarterly 14(3): 406-408.
  1125. Kock, Christian 1997. The function of poetry in our lives: Roman Jakobson's legacy and challenge to poetics. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia: International Journal of Linguistics 29(1): 305-319.
  1126. Jakobson, Roman 1972. Motor Signs for 'Yes' and 'No'. Language in Society 1(1): 91-96.
  1127. Waugh, Linda R. 1997. Roman Jakobson's work as a dialogue: The dialogue as the basis of language, the dialogue as the basis of scientific work. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia: International Journal of Linguistics 29(1): 101-120.
  1128. Waugh, Linda R. 1998. Marked and unmarked: A choice between unequals in semiotic structure. Semiotica 38(3-4): 299-318.
  1129. Waugh, Linda R. 1980. The Poetic Function in the Theory of Roman Jakobson. Poetics Today 2(1): 57-82.
  1130. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1961]. Introduction to the Symposium on the Structure of Language and Its Mathematical Aspects. In: Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 568-569.
  1131. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1953]. Pattern in Linguistics (Contribution to Debates with Anthropologists). In: Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 223-228.
  1132. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1967]. On the Relation between Visual and Auditory Signs. In: Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 338-344.
  1133. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1964]. Visual and Auditory Signs. In: Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 334-337.
  1134. Lotman, Juri M. 1988[1981]. The Semiotics of Culture and the Concept of a Text. Soviet Psychology 26: 52-58.
  1135. Lotman, Juri M. 1994[1981]. The Text within the Text. Translated by Jerry Leo and Amy Mandelker. PMLA 109(3): 377-384.
  1136. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1954]. Two Aspects of Language and Two Types of Aphasic Disturbances. In: Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 239-696.
  1137. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1975]. A Few Remarks on Peirce, Pathfinder in the Science of Language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 248-253.
  1138. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1974]. A Glance at the Development of Semiotics. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 199-218.
  1139. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1968]. Language in Relation to Other Communication Systems. In: Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 697-708.
  1140. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1967]. Linguistics in Relation to Other Sciences. In: Selected Writings II: Word and Language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 655-696.
  1141. Richards, I. A. 1953. Toward a Theory of Translating. In: Wright, Arthur F. (ed.), Studies in Chinese Thought. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 247-262.
  1142. Ruesch, Jurgen 1972[1953]. Synopsis of the Theory of Human Communication. In: Semiotic Approaches to Human Relations. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 47-93.
  1143. Wenner, Adrian M. 1969. The Study of Animal Communication: An Overviev. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 232-243.
  1144. Sebeok, Thomas A. 1969. Semiotics and Ethology. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 200-231.
  1145. Ramsay, Alexandra 1969. Time, Space, and Hierarchy in Zoosemiotics. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 179-199.
  1146. Moulton, James M. 1969. The Classification of Acoustic Communicative Behavior Among Teleost Fishes. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 146-178.
  1147. Moles, Abraham A. 1969. The Concept of Language from the Point of View of Animal Communication. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 138-145.
  1148. Lenneberg, Eric H. 1969. Problems in the Systematization of Communicative Behavior. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 131-137.
  1149. Count, Earl W. 1969. Animal Communication in Man-Science: An Essay in Perspective. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 71-130.
  1150. Carpenter, C. R. 1969. Approaches to Studies of the Naturalistic Communicative Behavior in Nonhuman Primates. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 40-70.
  1151. Busnel, Marie-Claire 1969. The Psychophysiological Study of Acoustic Communication in Animals. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 31-39.
  1152. Bateson, Gregory 1969. Metalogue: What is an instinct? In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Alexandra Ramsay (eds.), Approaches to Animal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 11-30.
  1153. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1956]. Metalanguage as a Linguistic Problem. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 113-121.
  1154. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1967]. Language and Culture. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 101-112.
  1155. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1973]. Communication and Society. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 98-100.
  1156. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1969]. The Fundamental and Specific Characteristics of Human Language. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 93-97.
  1157. Jakobson, Roman 1985[1972]. Verbal Communication. In: Rudy, Stephen (ed.), Selected Writings VII: Contributions to Comparative Mythology. Studies in Linguistics and Philology, 1972-1982. Preface by Linda R. Waugh. Berlin; New York; Amsterdam: Mouton, 81-92.
  1158. Latif, Israil A. 1934. The Physiological Basis of Linguistic Development and of the Ontogeny of Meaning. Part I. Psychological Review 41(1): 55-85.
  1159. Sebeok, Thomas A. 1975. The Semiotic Web: A Chronicle of Prejudices. Bulletin of Literary Semiotics 2: 1-63.
  1160. Wescott, Roger W. 1966. Introducing Coenetics: A Biosocial Analysis of Communication. The American Scholar 35(2): 342-354.
  1161. Joos, Martin 1950. Description of Language Design. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 22(6): 701-708.
  1162. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1965]. Quest for the Essence of Language. In: Selected Writings II: Word and language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 345-359.
  1163. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1960]. Linguistics and Communication Theory. In: Selected Writings II: Word and language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 570-579.
  1164. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1959]. On Linguistic Aspects of Translation. In: Selected Writings II: Word and language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 260-266.
  1165. Jakobson, Roman 1971[1953]. Results of a Joint Conference of Anthropologists and Linguists. In: Selected Writings II: Word and language. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 554-567.
  1166. Morris, Charles W. 1938. Foundations of the Theory of Signs. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
  1167. Nöth, Winfried 2006. Yuri Lotman on metaphors and culture as self-referential semiospheres. Semiotica 161(1): 249-263.
  1168. Nöth, Winfried 2003. Semiotic foundations of the study of pictures. Sign Systems Studies 31(2): 377-391.
  1169. Morris, Charles 1949. Signs, Language and Behavior. New York: Prentice-Hall, Inc.
  1170. Mitchell, W.J. Thomas 1986. Iconology: Image, Text, Ideology. Chicago; London: The University of Chicago Press.
  1171. Aija, Indrek 2002. Sümboliline tarbimine ja personaalne muljekorraldus. Bakalaureusetöö. Juhendaja: Peeter Torop. Tartu ülikool, Sotsiaalteaduskond, Semiootika Osakond. Unpublished manuscript.
  1172. Torop, Peeter 2002. Locations in Intersemiotic Space. In: Sarapik, V., K. Tüür and M. Laanemets (eds.), Koht ja Paik II. Place and Location II. Tallinn: Proceedings of the Estonian Academy of Arts, 59-68.
  1173. Broms, Henri and Henrik Gahmberg 1983. Communication to Self in Organizations and Cultures. Administrative Science Quarterly 28(3): 482-495.
  1174. Steedman, Marek 2006. State Power, Hegemony, and Memory. In: Shönle, Andreas (ed.), Lotman and Cultural Studies: Encounters and Extensions. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 136-158.
  1175. Märtsin, Mariann 2008. Self and Other in Communication and Cognition: The Role of Auto-Communication and Intersubjectivity in Autopoiesis of Psychic Systems. Integrative Psychological & Behavioral Science 42(2): 208-211.
  1176. Torop, Peeter 2008. Translation as communication and auto-communication. Sign Systems Studies 36(2): 375-397.
  1177. Saarma, Jüri 1979. Biosfäär, tehnosfäär, psühhosfäär. Kivi, Juhan (ed.), Teadus ja Tänapäev. Tallinn: Eesti Raamat, 203-211.
  1178. Lotman, Mihhail 2012. Struktuur ja Vabadus I: Semiootika Vaatevinklist. I.I Tartu-Moskva koolkond: tekstist semiosfäärini. Lotman, Rebekka (ed.). Tallinn: Tallinna Ülikooli Kirjastus.
  1179. Braddick, Michael J. 2009. Introduction: The Politics of Gesture. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 9-35.
  1180. Brubaker, Leslie 2009. Gesture in Byzantium. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 36-56.
  1181. Depreux, Philippe 2009. Gestures and Comportment at the Carolingian Court: Between Practice and Perception. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 57-79.
  1182. Rubin, Miri 2009. Gestures of Pain, Implications of Guilt: Mary and the Jews. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 80-95.
  1183. Walter, John 2009. Gesturing at Authority: Deciphering the Gestural Code of Early Modern England. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 96-127.
  1184. Jones, Colin 2009. Meeting, Greeting and Other 'Little Customs of the Day' on the Streets of Late Eighteenth-Century Paris. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 144-171.
  1185. Sennefelt, Karin 2009. The Politics of Hanging Around and Tagging Along: Everyday Practices of Politics in Eighteenth-Century Stockholm. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 172-190.
  1186. Arnold, David 2009. Salutation and Subversion: Gestural Politics in Nineteenth-Century India. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 191-211.
  1187. Hevia, James L. 2009. 'The Ultimate Gesture of Deference and Debasement': Kowtowing in China. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 212-234.
  1188. Vincent, Mary 2009. Expiation as Performative Rhetoric in National-Catholicism: The Politics of Gesture in Post-Civil War Spain. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 235-256.
  1189. Fulbrook, Mary 2009. Embodying the Self: Gestures and Dictatorship in Twentieth-Century Germany. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 257-279.
  1190. Handler, Richard 2009. Erving Goffman and the Gestural Dynamics of Modern Selfhood. In: Braddick, Michael J. (ed.), The Politics of Gesture: Historical Perspectives. Oxford, New York: Oxford Journals, Oxford University Press, 280-300.
  1191. Bohl, Vivian and Nivedita Gangopadhyay 2013. Theory of mind and the unobservability of other minds. Philosophical Explorations: An International Journal for the Philosophy of Mind and Action. Published online.
  1192. Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang 2013a. Preface. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, vii-x.
  1193. Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang 2013b. Reading People: Introduction to the World of Nonverbal Behavior. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 3-14.
  1194. Matsumoto, David and Hyi Sung Hwang 2013a. Facial Expressions. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 15-52.
  1195. Frank, Mark G.; Andreas Maroulis and Darrin J. Griffin 2013. The Voice. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 53-74.
  1196. Matsumoto, David and Hyi Sung Hwang 2013b. Body and Gesture. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 75-96.
  1197. Matsumoto, David and Hyi Sung Hwang 2013c. Cultural Influences on Nonverbal Behavior. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 97-120.
  1198. Frank, Mark G. and Elena Svetieva 2013. Deception. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 121-146.
  1199. Maccario, Carl Joseph 2013. Aviation Security and Nonverbal Behavior. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 147-154.
  1200. Ennett, Joseph 2013. A Cop's Nonverbal Journey. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 155-162.
  1201. Moskal, Paul M. 2013. Anomalies and Nonverbal Behavior. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 163-172.
  1202. Baxter, Daniel H. 2013. Understanding Body Language and the Polygraph. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 173-181.
  1203. Brownell, Scott 2013. Nonverbal Behavior in the Courtroom. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 183-190.
  1204. Freshman, Clark 2013. Persuasion, Negotiation, and the Law. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 191-200.
  1205. Boughton, Andrew 2013. Negotiation and Nonverbal Communication. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 201-212.
  1206. Longford, Steve 2013. Interpersonal Skills and Nonverbal Communication. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 213-224.
  1207. Harrington, Nick R. 2013. Nonverbal Communication in Consumer Research. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 225-236.
  1208. Sheeler, Robert 2013. Nonverbal Communication in Medical Practice. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 237-246.
  1209. Privitera, Michael R. 2013. Nonverbal Behavior and Psychiatric Observation. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 247-258.
  1210. Frank, Mark G; Hiy Sung Hwang and David Matsumoto 2013. Synthesis and Conclusion. In: Matsumoto, David; Mark G. Frank and Hyi Sung Hwang (eds.), Nonverbal Communication: Science and Applications. Los Angeles (etc.): SAGE, 259-282.
  1211. Torop, Peeter 2000a. New Tartu Semiotics. European Journal for Semiotic Studies 12(1): 5-46.
  1212. Randviir, Anti 2000. Semiotization: What, Where, How? (The Case of the City). European Journal for Semiotic Studies 12(1): 47-69.
  1213. Torop, Peeter 2000b. Intersemiosis and Intersemiotic Translation. European Journal for Semiotic Studies 12(1): 71-100.
  1214. Kull, Kalevi 2000. Copy versus Translate, Meme versus Sign: Development of Biological Textuality. European Journal for Semiotic Studies 12(1): 101-120.
  1215. Levčenko, Jan 2000. The Movable Author: On Several Units of Structure in V. Šklovskij's Sentimental Journey. European Journal for Semiotic Studies 12(1): 181-192.
  1216. Avramec, Irina 2000. Mythological Motifs in F. M. Dostoevskij's Story The Landlady. European Journal for Semiotic Studies 12(1): 193-204.
  1217. Pärli, Ülle 2000. The Poem "The Bronze Horseman" by A. Puškin in Estonian Culture. European Journal for Semiotic Studies 12(1): 205-232.
  1218. Turk, Horst 2000. Cultural Text and the Text of Tradition. In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 9-36.
  1219. Torop, Peeter 2000. Kultuuri tekstuaalsus. In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 37-51.
  1220. Levtšenko, Jan 2000. Mõned ülestähendused teaduskeele sõnastiku poeetikast. In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 52-62.
  1221. Veidemann, Rein 2000. Tõlkimine kui avastamine. In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 63-70.
  1222. Lill, Anne 2000. Antiigitraditsioon ja barokk: 17. sajandi ladinakeelne akadeemiline ülistusluule. In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 71-91.
  1223. Pärli, Ülle 2000. Tõlkimine kui kultuurimehhanism: 19. sajandi lõpu eestindused vene kirjandusest. In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 92-105.
  1224. Luukas, Liina 2000. Eesti-Saksa kirjanduslik opositsioonilisus 19. ja 20. sajandi vahetusel. In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 106-123.
  1225. Kalda, Maie 2000. Redigeerimine kui steriliseerimine (F. Tuglase naitel). In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 124-132.
  1226. Lotman, Mihhail and Maria-Kristiina Lotman 2000. Tekst ja mälu (värsistruktuur ja selle semantika). In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 133-150.
  1227. Randviir, Anti 2000. Kaart kui kultuuritekst. In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 151-171.
  1228. Kotov, Kaie 2000. Intersemiootilised mehhanismid sõnas-ja-pildis. In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 172-185.
  1229. Pilv, Aare 2000. Juhatus autometateksti mõistesse: Skolastiline essee. In: Pärli, Ülle (ed.), Kultuuritekst ja traditsioonitekst. 26.-27.novembril 1999 Tartus toimunud seminari materjalid. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus., 186-196.
  1230. Meyen, Sergei V. 1988. On the structure of theoretical biology. In: Kull, Kalevi and Toomas Tiivel (eds.), Lectures in Theoretical Biology. Tallinn: Valgus, 15-21.
  1231. Lotman, Juri 1988. Natural environment and information. In: Kull, Kalevi and Toomas Tiivel (eds.), Lectures in Theoretical Biology. Tallinn: Valgus, 45-47.
  1232. Lotman, Aleksei 1988. On axiomatic method in ethology. In: Kull, Kalevi and Toomas Tiivel (eds.), Lectures in Theoretical Biology. Tallinn: Valgus, 48-54.
  1233. Chebanov, Sergei V. 1988. Theoretical biology in biocentrism. In: Kull, Kalevi and Toomas Tiivel (eds.), Lectures in Theoretical Biology. Tallinn: Valgus, 159-168.
  1234. Schreider, Julius A. 1988. On socio-humanitarian problems of biological knowledge. In: Kull, Kalevi and Toomas Tiivel (eds.), Lectures in Theoretical Biology. Tallinn: Valgus, 169-176.
  1235. Kull, Kalevi 1996. Biosemiootika: Märkmeid sissejuhatuseks. In: Maiväli Ülo, Kalevi Kull and Tõnu Möls (eds.), Elu keeled. Tartu; Tallinn: Teaduste Akadeemia Kirjastus, 8-19.
  1236. Randviir, Anti 1996. Semiootika ja biosemiootika: Mõned näited metakeele vallas. In: Maiväli Ülo, Kalevi Kull and Tõnu Möls (eds.), Elu keeled. Tartu; Tallinn: Teaduste Akadeemia Kirjastus, 20-28.
  1237. Reeben, Mati 1996. Keel ja mälu: Molekulidest neuraalsete võrkudeni. In: Maiväli Ülo, Kalevi Kull and Tõnu Möls (eds.), Elu keeled. Tartu; Tallinn: Teaduste Akadeemia Kirjastus, 67-70.
  1238. Sebeok, Thomas A. 1989. Preface. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, v-xiv.
  1239. Urban, Greg and Benjamin Lee 1989a. Introduction. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 1-13.
  1240. Wolf, Ernest S. 1989. The Self in Psychoanalytic Self Psychology. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 15-25.
  1241. Urban, Greg 1989. The "I" Of Discourse. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 27-51.
  1242. Straus, Terry 1989. The Self in Northern Cheyenne Language and Culture. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 53-68.
  1243. Daniel, Valentine E. 1989. The Semeiosis of Suicide in Sri Lanka. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 69-100.
  1244. Rosen, Lawrence 1989. Responsibility and Compensatory Justice in Arab Culture and Law. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 101-120.
  1245. Varenne, Hervé 1989. A Congusion of Signs: The Semiosis of Anthropological Ireland. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 121-152.
  1246. Boon, James A. 1989. Against Coping Across Cultures: The Semiotics of Self-Help Rebuffed. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 153-170.
  1247. Leaf, Murray J. 1989. Singer, Kant, and the Semiotic Self. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 171-192.
  1248. Lee, Benjamin 1989. Semiotic Origins of the Mind-Body Dualism. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 193-228.
  1249. Singer, Milton 1989. Pronouns, Persons, and the Semiotic Self. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 229-296.
  1250. Lee, Benjamin and Greg Urban 1989b. Afterthoughts. In: Lee, Benjamin & Greg Urban (eds.), Semiotics, self, and society. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 297-303.
  1251. Torop, Peeter 1999. Kultuurimärgid. Tartu: Ilmamaa.
  1252. Booth, Wayne C. 1984. Introduction. In: Emerson, Caryl (trans. & ed.), Problems of Dostoevsky's Poetics. Minneapolis; London: University of Minnesota Press, xiii-xxvii.
  1253. Emerson, Caryl 1984. Editor's Preface. In: Emerson, Caryl (trans. & ed.), Problems of Dostoevsky's Poetics. Minneapolis; London: University of Minnesota Press, xxix-xliii.
  1254. Bakhtin, Mikhail 1984. Problems of Dostoevsky's Poetics. Translated and edited by Caryl Emerson. Minneapolis; London: University of Minnesota Press.
  1255. Kantor, Jacob Robert 1922. Memory: A Triphase Objective Action. Journal of Philosophy 19(23): 624-639.
  1256. Nielsen, Greg M. 2000. Action and Eros in the Creative Zone: Kant, Weber and Bakhtin. Dialogism 4: 34-53.
  1257. Koczanowicz, Leszek 2000. Freedom and Communication: The Concept of Human Self in Mead and Bakhtin. Dialogism 4: 54-66.
  1258. Bonetskaia, N. K. 2004. Mikhail Bakhtin's Life and Philosophical Idea. Russian Studies in Philosophy 43(1): 5-34.
  1259. Torop, Peeter 2005. Semiosphere and/as the research object of semiotics of culture. Sign Systems Studies 33(1): 159-173.
  1260. Danesi, Marcel 2013. On the Metaphorical Connectivity of Cultural Sign Systems. Signs and Society 1(1): 33-49.
  1261. Lateiner, Donald 1996. Nonverbal Behaviors in Ovid's Poetry, Primarily Metamorphoses 14. The Classical Journal 91(3): 225-253.
  1262. Ritchie, Benbow F. 1956. Review of Theories of Perception and the Concept of Structure... by Floyd H. Allport. American Journal of Psychology 69: 498-501.
  1263. Stouffer, Samuel A. 1930. An Experimental Comparison of Statistical and Case History Methods of Attitude Research. Doctoral Dissertation, University of Chicago. Unpublished manuscript.
  1264. Cooley, Charles Horton 1909. Social Organization: A Study of the Larger Mind. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons.
  1265. Kulp, Daniel H., II. 1935. Concepts in Attitude Tests With Special Reference to Social Questions. Sociology and Social Research 19: 218-224.
  1266. Young, Kimball 1930. Language and Social Interaction. In: Social Psychology: An Analysis of Social Behavior. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 203-232.
  1267. Rice, Stuart A. 1930. Statistical Studies of Social Attitudes and Public Opinion. In: Rice, Stuart A. (ed.), Statistics in Social Studies. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 171-192.
  1268. Bain, Read 1930. Theory and Measurement of Attitudes and Opinions. Psychological Bulletin 27: 357-379.
  1269. Mandelker, Amy 1994. Semiotizing the Sphere: Organicist Theory in Lotman, Bakhtin, and Vernadsky. PMLA 109(3): 385-396.
  1270. Mead, George H. 1915. Natural Rights and the Theory of the Political Institutions. The Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods 12(6): 141-155.
  1271. Barsky, Robert F. 1998. Bakhtin as Anarchist? Language, Law, and Creative Impulses in the Work of Mikhail Bakhtin and Rudolf Rocker. The South Atlantic Quarterly 97(3): 623-642.
  1272. Mead, George H. 1900. Suggestions Toward a Theory of the Philosophical Disciplines. The Philosophical Review 9(1): 1-17.
  1273. Bakhtin, Mikhail M. 1968. The Role of Games in Rabelais. Yale French Studies 41: 124-132.
  1274. Mead, George H. 1908. The Philosophical Basis of Ethics. International Journal of Ethics 18(3): 311-323.
  1275. Renfrew, Alastair 2006. A Word about Material (Bakhtin and Tynianov). The Slavonic and East European Review 84(3): 419-445.
  1276. Mead, George H. 1910. What Social Objects Must Psychology Presuppose? The Journal of Philosophy, Psyochology and Scientific Methods 7(7): 174-180.
  1277. Cresswell, James and Ulrich Teucher 2011. The body and language: M.M. Bakhtin on ontogenetic development. New Ideas in Psychology 29: 106-118.
  1278. Mead, George H. 1912. The Mechanism of Social Consciousness. The Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods 9(15): 401-406.
  1279. Cresswell, James and Allison Hawn 2012. Drawing on Bakhtin and Goffman: Toward an Epistemology that Makes Lived Experience Visible. Forum: Qualitative Social Research 13(1), Art. 20.
  1280. Mead, George H. 1913. The Social Self. The Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods 10(14): 374-380.
  1281. Bethea, David M. 1997. Bakhtinian Prosaics versus Lotmanian "Poetic Thinking": The Code and Its Relation to Literary Biography. The Slavic and East European Journal 41(1): 1-15.
  1282. Leidner, Bernard, Hammad Sheikh and Jeremy Ginges 2012. Affective Dimensions of Intergroup Humiliation. PLoS ONE 7(9): e46375.
  1283. Snow, David A. 2001. Extending and Broadening Blumer's Conceptualization of Symbolic Interactionism. Symbolic Interaction 24(3): 367-377.
  1284. Kaplan, Bernard 1961. An Approach to the Problem of Symbolic Representation: Nonverbal and Verbal. The Journal of Communication 11(2): 52-62.
  1285. Knapp, Mark L., John M. Wiemann and John A. Daly 1978. Nonverbal Communication: Issues and Appraisal. Human Communication Research 4(3): 271-180.
  1286. Andersen, Peter A., John P. Garrison and Janis F. Andersen 1979. Implications of a Neurophysiological Approach for the Study of a Nonverbal Communication. Human Comunication Research 6(1): 74-89.
  1287. Ekman, Paul 1976. Movements With Precise Meanings. Journal of Communication 26: 14-26.
  1288. Young, Richard F. 2009. Foundations for the Study of Practice. Language Learning 58(s2): 9-47.
  1289. Bergman, Mats 2009. Experience, Purpose, and the Value of Vagueness: On C. S. Peirce's Contribution to the Philosophy of Communication. Communication Theory 19: 248-277.
  1290. Holloway, Ralph L. Jr. 1992[1969]. Culture: A Human Domain. Current Anthropology 33(1): 47-64.
  1291. Geertz, Cliffort 1957. Ritual and Social Change: A Javanese Example. American Anthropologist 59(1): 32-54.
  1292. Liszka, Jakob 1981. Peirce and Jakobson: Towards a Structuralist Reconstruction of Peirce. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 17: 41-61.
  1293. Randviir, Anti 1998. Sign as an Object of Social Semiotics: Evolution of Cartographic Semiosis. Sign Systems Studies 26: 392-416.
  1294. Mills, C. Wright 1940. Situated Actions and Vocabularies of Motive. American Sociological Review 5(6): 904-913.
  1295. Rochberg-Halton, Eugene 1982. Situation, Structure, and the Context of Meaning. The Sociological Quarterly 23(4): 455-467.
  1296. Hall, Edward T. 1989. Beyond Culture. New York: Anchor Books.
  1297. Blau, Peter M. 1964. Exchange and Power in Social Life. New York; London; Sydney: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  1298. Stone, Gregory P. 1977. Personal Acts. Symbolic Interaction 1(1): 2-19.
  1299. Bonfante, G. and Thomas A. Sebeok 1944. Linguistics and the Age and Area Hypothesis. American Anthropologist 46(3): 382-386.
  1300. Arensberg, Conrad M. 1972. Culture as Behavior: Structure and Emergence. Annual Review of Anthropology 1: 1-27.
  1301. Sebeok, Thomas A. 1962. Coding in the Evolution of Signalling Behavior. Behavioral Science 7(4): 430-442.
  1302. Denzin, Norman K. 1987. On Semiotics and Symbolic Interactionism. Symbolic Interactionism 10(1): 1-19.
  1303. Dewey, John 1946. Peirce's Theory of Linguistic Signs, Thought, and Meaning. The Journal of Philosophy 43(4): 85-95.
  1304. Gans, Herbert J. 1999. Participant Observation in the Era of "Ethnography". Journal of Contemporary Ethnography 28(5): 540-548.
  1305. Newbold, R. F. 1986. Nonverbal Communication and Parataxis in Late Antiquity. L’Antiquité Classique 55: 223-244.
  1306. Idol, John L. 1991. "A Linked Circle of Three" Plus One: Nonverbal Communication in "The Marble Faun". Studies in the Novel 23(1): 139-151.
  1307. Halton, Eugene 2004. The Living Gesture and the Signifying Moment. Symbolic Interaction 27(1): 89-113.
  1308. Landwehr, Margarete 2002. Literature and the Visual Arts: Questions of Influence and Intertextuality. College Literature 29(3): 1-16.
  1309. Shusterman, Richard 2009. Somaesthetics and C. S. Peirce. The Journal of Speculative Philosophy 23(1): 8-27.
  1310. Moxley, Roy A. 2004. B. F. Skinner's Adoption of Peirce's Pragmatic Meaning for Habits. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 40(4): 743-769.
  1311. Laferrière, Daniel 1979. Making Room for Semiotics. Academe 65(7): 434-440.
  1312. Fleckenstein, Kristie S. 2001. Bodysigns: A Biorhetoric for Change. JAC 21(4): 761-790.
  1313. Umiker-Sebeok, Jean and Thomas A. Sebeok 1981. Clever Hans and Smart Simians: The Self-Fulfilling Prophecy and Kindred Methodological Pitfalls. Anthropos 76(1/2): 89-165.
  1314. Beuchot, Mauricio and John Deely 1995. Common Sources for the Semiotic of Charles Peirce and John Poinsot. The Review of Metaphysics 48(3): 539-566.
  1315. Kalaga, Wojciechi 1986. The Concept of Interpretant in Literary Semiotics. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 22(1): 43-59.
  1316. Atkin, Albert 2005. Peirce on the Index and Indexical Reference. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 41(1): 161-188.
  1317. Portch, Stephen R. 1982. Writing Without Words: A Nonverbal Approach to Reading Fiction. The Journal of General Education 34(1): 84-101.
  1318. Bassett, John E. 1986. Literature's Silent Language: Nonverbal Communication. by Stephen R. Porth. American Literature 58(2): 297-299.
  1319. Vannini, Phillip 2007. Social Semiotics and Fieldwork: Method and Analytics. Qualitative Inquiry 13: 113-140.
  1320. Kull, Kalevi 2003. Thomas A. Sebeok and biology: Building biosemiotics. Cybernetics And Human Knowing 10(1): 7-20.
  1321. Tsouyopoulos, Nelly 1988. The influence of John Brown's ideas in Germany. Medical History 32, Supplement 8: 63-74.
  1322. Gergen, Kenneth J. 1985. The Social Constructionist Movement in Modern Psychology. American Psychologist 40: 266-275.
  1323. Keesing, Roger M. 1972. Paradigm Lost: The New Ethnography and the New Linguistics. Southwestern Journal of Anthropology 28(4): 299-332.
  1324. Keesing, Roger M. 1974. Theories of Culture. Annual Review of Anthropology 3: 73-97.
  1325. Waldstein, Maxim 2007. Russifying Estonia? Iurii Lotman and the Politics of Language and Culture in Soviet Estonia. Kritika: Explorations in Russian and Eurasian History 8(3): 561-596.
  1326. Ardent, Hannah 1969. A Special Supplement: Reflections on Violence. Journal of International Affairs 27:
  1327. Chernov, Igor 1988. Historical survey of Tartu-Moscow Semiotic School. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 7-16.
  1328. Hoppal, Mihaly 1988. Ethnosemiotics and semiotics of culture. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 17-33.
  1329. Oguibenine, Boris 1988. On the World Tree symbolism: The sources of an analytical pattern. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 35-50.
  1330. Piatigorsky, Alexander 1988. Three origins of religious symbolism. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 59-65.
  1331. Sebeok, Thomas A. 1988. In what sense is language a "primary modeling system?". In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 67-80.
  1332. Shukman, Ann 1988. Towards a poetics of the absurd: The prose writings of Daniil Kharms. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 81-95.
  1333. Brohms, Henri and Yuri Lotman 1988. Greetings to the symposium. An interview with Yuri Lotman in Helsinki, June 1987. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 115-123.
  1334. Broms, Henri 1988a. Autocommunication - a way to induce visions to the organization. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 125-138.
  1335. Posner, Roland 1988. Semiotics vs. antropology: Alternatives in the explication of "culture". In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 151-184.
  1336. Toivonen, Pirjo-Maija 1988. Yu. M. Lotman's concept of poetic language and poetic text: The example of Baudelaire's Spleen II. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 191-197.
  1337. Yamaguchi, Masao 1988. "Center" and "periphery" in Japanese culture - in light of Tartu semiotics. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 199-219.
  1338. Broms, Henri 1988b. Unusual forms of commercial culture. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 223-231.
  1339. Danov, David K. 1988. Bakhtin and Lotman: Novel and culture. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 233-244.
  1340. Majava, Heikki 1988. On Bakhtin's psychoanalytical views. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 245-254.
  1341. Riikonen, H. K. 1988. Menippean satire: Some Bakhtinian aspects. In: Broms, Henri and Rebecca Kaufmann (eds.), Semiotics of Culture. Proceedings of the 25th Symposium of the Tartu-Moscow School of Semiotics, Imatra, Finland, 27th-29th July, 1987. Helsinki: Arator Inc., 255-277.
  1342. Anderson, Myrdene 1992. Concerning Gaia - Semiosic Production of/in/by/for Our Planet. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Jean Umiker-Sebeok (eds.), Biosemiotics: The Semiotic Web 1991. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 1-13.
  1343. Deely, John 1992. Semiotics and Biosemiotics: Are Sign-Science and Life-Science Coextensive? In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Jean Umiker-Sebeok (eds.), Biosemiotics: The Semiotic Web 1991. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 46-75.
  1344. Hoffmeyer, Jesper 1992. Some Semiotic Aspects of the Psycho-Physical Relation: The Endo-Exosemiotic Boundary. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Jean Umiker-Sebeok (eds.), Biosemiotics: The Semiotic Web 1991. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 101-123.
  1345. Merrell, Floyd 1992. As Signs Grow, So Life Goes. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Jean Umiker-Sebeok (eds.), Biosemiotics: The Semiotic Web 1991. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 251-281.
  1346. Uexküll, Thure von 1992. Varieties of Semiosis. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Jean Umiker-Sebeok (eds.), Biosemiotics: The Semiotic Web 1991. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 455-470.
  1347. Randviir, Anti 2001. Sociosemiotic perspectives on studying culture and society. Sign Systems Studies 29(2): 607-626.
  1348. Randviir, Anti 2004b. Spatialization of knowledge: Cartographic roots of globalization. Semiotica 150(1-4): 227-256.
  1349. Randviir, Anti 2007. On spatiality in Tartu-Moscow cultural semiotics: The semiotic subject. Sign Systems Studies 35(1): 137-159.
  1350. Cobley, Paul and Anti Randviir 2009. Introduction: What is sociosemiotics? Semiotica 173(1-4): 1-39.
  1351. Randviir, Anti 2002. Space and place as substrates of culture. In: Sarapik, V., K. Tüür and M. Laanemets (eds.), Koht ja Paik II. Place and Location II. Tallinn: Proceedings of the Estonian Academy of Arts, 140-154.
  1352. Colapietro, Vincent M. 1985. Inwardness and Autonomy: A Neglected Aspect of Peirce's Approach to Mind. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 21(4): 485-512.
  1353. Pape, Helmut 1984. Laws of Nature, Rules of Conduct and their Analogy in Peirce's Semiotics. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 20(3): 209-239.
  1354. Kessler, Gary E. 1978. Pragmatic Bodies Versus Transcendental Egos. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 14(2): 101-119.
  1355. Short, T. L. 1981. Semeiosis and Intentionality. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 17(3): 197-223.
  1356. Meyers, Robert G. 1992. Peirce's New Way of Signs. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 28(3): 505-521.
  1357. Joas, Hans 1990. The Creativity of Action and the Intersubjectivity of Reason: Mead's Pragmatism and Social Theory. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 26(2): 165-194.
  1358. Deledalle, Gérard 1992. Peirce's "Sign": Its Concept and Its Use. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 28(2): 289-301.
  1359. Tejera, V. 1993. Peirce's Semeiotic, and the Aesthetics of Literature. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 29(3): 427-455.
  1360. Colapietro, Vincent 1995. Notes for a Sketch of a Peircean Theory of the Unconscious. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 31(3): 482-506.
  1361. Petry, Edward S., Jr. 1992. The Origin and Development of Peirce's Concept of Self-Control. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 28(4): 667-690.
  1362. Holmes, Larry 1966. Peirce on Self-Control. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 2: 113-130.
  1363. Bayley, James E. 1976. A Jamesian Theory of Self. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 12(2): 148-165.
  1364. Powys, John Cowper 1933. A Philosophy of Solitude. New York: Simon and Schuster.
  1365. Bookchin, Murray 1986. Post-Scarcity Anarchism. Montreal; Buffalo: Black Rose Books.
  1366. Bookchin, Murray 1995. Social Anarchism or Lifestyle Anarchism: An Unbridgeable Chasm. Edinburg: AK Press.
  1367. Lane, Robert 2009. Persons, Signs, Animals: A Peircean Account of Personhood. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 45(1): 1-26.
  1368. Geniusas, Saulis 2006. Is the Self of Social Behaviorism Capable of Auto-Affection? Mead and Marion on the "I" and the "Me". Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 42(2): 242-265.
  1369. Garnar, Andrew 2006. Power, Action, Signs: Between Peirce and Foucault. Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society 42(3): 347-366.
  1370. Trout, Lara 2010. The Politics of Survival: Peirce, Affectivity, and Social Criticism. Bronx: Fordham University Press.
  1371. Sommer, Robert 1967. Sociofugal Space. American Journal of Sociology 72(6): 654-660.
  1372. Berger, Peter L. and Thomas Luckmann 1991. The Social Construction of Reality: A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books.
  1373. Foucault, Michel 1993. About the Beginning of the Hermeneutics of the Self: Two Lectures at Dartmouth. Political Theory 21(2): 198-227.
  1374. Burrow, J. A. 2002. Gestures and Looks in Medieval Narrative. Port Chester: Cambridge Unviersity Press.
  1375. Diggle, James 2004. The Nature and Purpose of the Characters. In: Diggle, James (ed.), Theophrastus: Characters. Cambridge (etc.): Cambridge University Press, 4-26.
  1376. Theophrastus 2004. Characters. In: Diggle, James (ed.), Theophrastus: Characters. Cambridge (etc.): Cambridge University Press, 61-157.
  1377. Hicks, E. L. 1882. On the Characters of Theophrastus. The Journal of Hellenic Studies 3: 128-143.
  1378. Tucker, Ian 2011. Bio-Somatic-Power. Outlines. Critical Practice Studies 13(1): 82-93.
  1379. Deledalle, Gérard 2000. Charles S. Peirce's Philosophy of Signs: Essays in Comparative Semiotics. Bloomingdon; Indianapolis: Indiana University Press.
  1380. Frank, Mark G. 2002. Nonverbal communication. In: Schement, Jorge Reina (ed.), Encyclopedia of Communication and Information. New York (etc.): Macmillan Reference USA, 669-677.
  1381. Douglas, Mary 1996. Natural Symbols: Explorations in Cosmology. 2nd edition. London; New York: Routledge.
  1382. Millard, Thomas L. 1962. Human Relations in a Changing Society, Trends and Principles. Journal of Educational Sociology 35(5): 228-235.
  1383. Gottdiener, M. 1985. Hegemony and Mass Culture: A Semiotic Approach. American Journal of Sociology 90(5): 979-1001.
  1384. Laclau, Ernesto 2007. Discourse. In: Goodwin, R. E. and P. Pettit (eds.), A companion to contemporary political philosophy. 2nd Edition. Oxford: Blackwell, 441-447.
  1385. Sylvan, Richard 2007. Anarchism. In: Goodwin, R. E. and P. Pettit (eds.), A companion to contemporary political philosophy. 2nd Edition. Oxford: Blackwell, 257-281.
  1386. Sparrow, Robert 2007. Anarchism since 1992. In: Goodwin, R. E. and P. Pettit (eds.), A companion to contemporary political philosophy. 2nd Edition. Oxford: Blackwell, 282-284.
  1387. Ward, Colin 2004. Anarchism: A Very Short Introduction. Oxford; New York: Oxford University Press.
  1388. Cassirer, Ernst 1932. Kant. In: Seligman, Edwin R. A. and Johnson Alvin (eds.), Encyclopaedia Of The Social Sciences. Vol VIII. London: Macmillan and Company Limited, 539-542.
  1389. Simon, Linda, Jeff Greenberg and Jack Brehm 1995. Trivialization: The Forgotten Mode of Dissonance Reduction. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 68(2): 247-260.
  1390. Gunnery, Sarah D., Judith A. Hall and Mollie A. Ruben 2013. The Deliberate Duchenne Smile: Individual Differences in Expressive Control. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 37(1): 29-41.
  1391. Donskis, Leonidas 2005. George Orwell: The anatomy of fanaticism and hatred. In: Baranova, Jūratė (ed.), Contemporary Philosophical Discourse in Lithuania. Lithuanian Philosophical Studies IV. Washinton: The Council for Research in Values and Philosophy, 71-95.
  1392. Prensky, Marc 2001. Digital Natives, Digital Immigrants. On the Horizon 9(5): 1-6.
  1393. Schrems, John J. 1967. Ernst Cassirer and Political Thought. The Review of Politics 29(2): 180-203.
  1394. Ball, Donald W. Ball 1973. Microecology: Social Situations and Intimate Space. Indianapolis: The Bobbs-Merrill Company.
  1395. Cheung, King-Kok 1993. Articulate Silences: Hisaye Yamamoto, Maxine Hong Kingston, Joy Kogawa. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.
  1396. Turner, Bryan S. 2008. The Body & Society. Third Edition. Nottingham: Nottingham Trent University.
  1397. Mazur, Allan, Eugene Rosa, Mark Faupel, Joshua Heller, Russell Leen and Blake Thurman 1980. Physiological Aspects of Communication Via Mutual Gaze. American Journal of Sociology 86(1): 50-74.
  1398. Miller, Walter B. 1955. Two Concepts of Authority. American Anthropologist 57(2): 271-289.
  1399. Synnott, Anthony 1989. Truth and Goodness, Mirrors and Masks - Part I: A Sociology of Beauty and the Face. The British Journal of Sociology 40(4): 607-636.
  1400. Tiedens, Larissa Z. and Alison R. Fragale 2003. Power Moves: Complementarity in Dominant and Submissive Nonverbal Behavior. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 84(3): 558-568.
  1401. Edinger, Joyce A. and Miles L. Patterson 1983. Nonverbal Involvement and Social Control. Psychological Bulletin 93(1): 30-56.
  1402. Ridgeway, Cecilia L., Joseph Berger and LeRoy Smith 1985. Nonverbal Cues and Status: An Expectation States Approach. American Journal of Sociology 90(5): 955-978.
  1403. Schwartz, Barry, Abraham Tesser and Evan Powell 1982. Dominance Cues in Nonverbal Behavior. Social Psychology Quarterly 45(2): 114-120.
  1404. Sherrington, C. S. 1907. On the proprio-ceptive system, especially in its reflex aspect. Brain 29(4):467-485.
  1405. Cleary, J. 1959. John Bulwer: Renaissance communicationist. Quarterly Journal of Speech 45: 391-398.
  1406. Tyler, Stephen A. 1985. Ethnography, intertextuality and the end of description. American Journal of Semiotics 3(4): 83-98.
  1407. Green, Thomas R. and Louis G. Tassinary 2002. The Mechanization of Emotional Expression in John Bulwer's "Pathomyotomia" (1649). The American Journal of Psychology 115(2): 275-299.
  1408. Smith, Justin E. H. 2010. ‘A Corporall Philosophy’: Language and ‘Body-Making’ in the Work of John Bulwer (1606–1656). In: Wolfe, Charles T. and Ofer Gal (eds.), The Body as Object and Instrument of Knowledge: Embodied Empiricism in Early Modern Science. Dordrecht: Springer, 169-183.
  1409. Wollock, Jeffrey 2012. Psychological Theory of John Bulwer. In: Rieber, Robert W. (ed.), Encyclopedia of the History of Psychological Theories. Dordrecht: Springer, 839-856.
  1410. Forbes, Clarence A. 1936. Books for the Burning. Transactions and Proceedings of the American Philological Association 67: 114-125.
  1411. Ritchie, J. M. 1988. The Nazi Book-Burning. The Modern Language Review 83(3): 627-643.
  1412. Woolston, Howard 1932. Propaganda in Soviet Russia. American Journal of Sociology 38(1): 32-40.
  1413. Buller, David B. and Judee K. Burgoon 1996. Interpersonal Deception Theory. Communication Theory 6(3): 203-242.
  1414. Ferrell, Lori Anne 2008. How-To Books, Protestant Kinetics, and the Art of Theology. Huntington Library Quarterly 71(4): 591-606.
  1415. Graeber, David 2004. Fragments of an Anarchist Anthropology. Chicago: Prickly Paradigm Press.
  1416. Preziosi, Donald 1979. Architecture, Language, and Meaning: The Origins of the Built World and its Semiotic Organization. Hague (etc.): Mouton.
  1417. Cushman, Donald P. and Dudley D. Cahn Jr. 1985. Communication in interpersonal relationships. Albany: State University of New York Press.
  1418. Miller, Derek 1964. Growth to Freedom: The Psychosocial Treatment of Delinquent Youth. London: Tavistock Publications.
  1419. Hymes, Dell 1977. Foundations in Sociolinguistic: An Ethnographic Approach. London: Tavistock Publications.
  1420. Ruben, Brent D. and Richard W. Budd 1975. Human Communication Handbook: Simulations and Games, Volume 1. Piscataway: Transaction Publishers.
  1421. Siegman, Aron W. and Stanley Felstein 1979a. Preface. In: Siegman, Aron W. and Stanley Felstein (eds.), Of Speech and Time: Temporal Speech Patterns in Interpersonal Contexts. Hillsdale: John Wiley & Sons, Inc, i-x.
  1422. Siegman, Aron W. and Stanley Felstein 1979b. Introduction. In: Siegman, Aron W. and Stanley Felstein (eds.), Of Speech and Time: Temporal Speech Patterns in Interpersonal Contexts. Hillsdale: John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 1-16.
  1423. Jaffe, Joseph and Samuel W. Anderson 1979. Communication Rhythms and the Evolution of Language. In: Siegman, Aron W. and Stanley Felstein (eds.), Of Speech and Time: Temporal Speech Patterns in Interpersonal Contexts. Hillsdale: John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 17-22.
  1424. Beebe, Beatrice, Daniel Stern and Joseph Jaffe 1979. The Kinesic Rhythm of Mother-Infant Interactions. In: Siegman, Aron W. and Stanley Felstein (eds.), Of Speech and Time: Temporal Speech Patterns in Interpersonal Contexts. Hillsdale: John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 23-34.
  1425. Kecskemeti, Paul 1950. Totalitarian Communications as a Means of Control: A Note on the Sociology of Propaganda. The Public Opinion Quarterly 14(2): 224-234.
  1426. Cohn, Jesse S. 2006. Anarchism and the Crisis of Representation: Hermeneutics, Aesthetics, Politics. Cranbury: Associated University Press.
  1427. Mills, C. Wright 2000[1959]. The Sociological Imagination. With a new Afterword by Todd Gitlin. Oxford (etc.): Oxford University Press.
  1428. Scott, J. P. 1948. Dominance and the Frustration-Aggression Hypothesis. Physiological Zoology 21(1): 31-39.
  1429. Glasel, Daniel 1946. The Sentiments of American Soldiers Abroad Toward Europeans. American Journal of Sociology 51(5): 433-438.
  1430. Gosnell, Harold F. 1942. Symbols of National Solidarity. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science 223: 157-161.
  1431. Joos, Martin 1972. Semantic Axiom Number One. Language 48(2): 257-265.
  1432. Derrida, Jacques 1979. Scribble (Writing-Power). Yale French Studies 58: 117-147.
  1433. Ebert, Teresa L. 1986. The Crisis of Representation in Cultural Studies: Reading Postmodern Texts Critical Angles: European Views of Contemporary American Literature by Marc Chenetier. American Quarterly 38(5): 894-902.
  1434. Silva-Fuenzalida, Ismael 1949. Ethnolinguistics and the Study of Culture. American Anthropologist 51(3): 446-456.
  1435. Bartsch, Anne and Susanne Hübner 2005. Towards a Theory of Emotional Communication. CLCWeb: Comparative Literature and Culture 7(4), article 2.
  1436. Milstein, Cindy 2010. Anarchism and Its Aspirations. Oakland: AK Press.
  1437. Farina, Almo and Andrea Belgrano 2006. The eco-field hypothesis: toward a cognitive landscape. Landscape Ecology 21: 5-17.
  1438. Nielsen, Soeren Nors 2007. Towards an ecosystem semiotics: Some basic aspects for a new research programme. Ecological Complexity 4: 93-101.
  1439. Nöth, Winfried 2001. Ecosemiotics and the semiotics of nature. Sign Systems Studies 29(1): 71-81.
  1440. Uexküll, Jakob von 1982. The Theory of Meaning. Semiotica 42(1): 25-79.
  1441. Lindahl Elliot, Nils 2006. Mediating Nature. London; New York: Routledge.
  1442. McIsaac, G. F. and M. 1999. Brün Natural Environment and Human Culture: Defining Terms and Understanding Worldviews. Journal of Environmental Quality 28(1): 1-10.
  1443. Stables, Andrew 1996. Reading the environment as text: Literary theory and environmental education. Environmental Education Research 2(2): 189-195.
  1444. Rueckert, William 1996. Literature and Ecology. An experiment in ecocriticism. In: Glotfelty, Cheryll and Harold Fromm (eds.), The Ecocriticism Reader: Landmarks in Literary Ecology. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 105-123.
  1445. Sebeok, Thomas A. 1992. 'Tell Me, Where is Fancy Bred?': The Biosemiotic Self. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Jean Umiker-Sebeok (eds.), Biosemiotics: The Semiotic Web 1991. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 333-343.
  1446. Kull, Kalevi 1992. Evolution and Semiotics. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Jean Umiker-Sebeok (eds.), Biosemiotics: The Semiotic Web 1991. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 221-233.
  1447. Csányi, Vilmos 1992. The Brain's Models and Communication. In: Sebeok, Thomas A. and Jean Umiker-Sebeok (eds.), Biosemiotics: The Semiotic Web 1991. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 27-43.
  1448. Hall, Edward T. 2009[1964]. Silent Assumptions in Social Communication. In: Gutman, Robert and Nathan Glazer (Eds.), People and Buildings. New Brunswick: Transaction Publishers, 135-151.
  1449. Hall, Edward T. 1968. Proxemics. Current Anthropology 9(2/3): 83-95.
  1450. Birdwhistell, Ray 1968. Comments and Replies to Edward T. Hall's Proxemics. Current Anthropology 9(2/3): 95-108.
  1451. Leeuwen, Theo Van 2009. Discourses of identity. Language Teaching 42(2): 212-221.
  1452. Laclau, Ernesto 1996. Emancipation(s). London; New York: Verso.
  1453. Schönle, Andreas 2002. Lotman and cultural studies: The case for cross-fertilization. Sign Systems Studies 30(2): 429-440.
  1454. Foucault, Michel 1980. Power/Knowledge: Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972-1977. Edited by Colin Gordon. New York: Pantheon Books.
  1455. Prince, Hugh 1989. Art and agrarian change, 1710-1815. In: Cosgove, Denis and Stephen Daniels (eds.), The Iconography of Landscape: Essays on the Symbolic Representation, Design and Use of Past Environments. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
  1456. Ingold, Tim 2006. The Perception of the Environment: Essays in livelihood, dwelling and skill. London, New York: Routledge.
  1457. Wichester, Hilary, P. M., Lily Kong and Kevin C. Dunn 2003. Landscapes: Ways of imagining the world. Harlow: Pearson Education Limited.
  1458. Kõresaar, Ene 2002. The farm as the symbol of the state: Metaphorical depiction of the nation and the state in the childhood memories of older Estonians. In: Jaago, Tiiu (ed.), Lives, Histories and Identities Vol. II: Individual. Society. Life story. Tartu: University of Tartu, Estonian Literary Museum, 169-187.
  1459. Sooväli, Helen, Hannes Paland and Mart Külvik 2003. The Role of Rural Landscapes in Shaping Estonian National Identity. In: Unwin, Tim and Theo Spek (eds.) European Landscapes: From Mountain to Sea. Tallinn: Huma, 114-121.
  1460. Palang, Hannes 2010. Time boundaries and landscape change: collective farms 1947-1994. European Countryside 2(3): 169-181.
  1461. Mauss, Marcel 1973. The Techniques of the Body. Economy and Society 2(1): 70-88.
  1462. Sharp, Lesley A. 2000. The Commodification of the Body and Its Parts. Annual Review of Anthropology 29: 287-328.
  1463. Murray, Stephen O. and Marcel Mauss 1989. A 1934 Interview with Marcel Mauss. American Ethnologist 16(1): 163-168.
  1464. Bertonoff, Deborah 1967. A Comparative Study of the Movement Accentuation of the Body in Different Nations. Journal of the International Folk Music Council 19: 53-54.
  1465. Lock, Margaret 1993. Cultivating the Body: Anthropology and Epistemologies of Bodily Practice and Knowledge. Annual Review of Anthropology 22: 133-155.
  1466. Kroeber, A. L. 1956. The Place of Boas in Anthropology. American Anthropologist 58(1): 151-159.
  1467. Garnett, A. Campbell 1950. In Search of the Miraculous by P. D. Ouspensky. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science 268: 248-249
  1468. Gordon, Mel 1978. Gurdjieff's Movement Demonstrations: The Theatre of the Miraculous. The Drama Review: TDR 22(2): 32-44.
  1469. Mace, C. A. 1931. Faculties and Instincts. Mind 40(157): 37-48.
  1470. Kenez, Peter 1980. Letters from Russia 1919. by P. D. Ouspensky. Slavic Review 39(3): 496-497.
  1471. Weitz, Shirley 1974a. Introduction. In: Weitz, Shirley (ed.), Nonverbal communication: readings with commentary. New York (etc.): Oxford University Press, 3-10.
  1472. Weitz, Shirley 1974b. Facial expression and visual interaction. In: Weitz, Shirley (ed.), Nonverbal communication: readings with commentary. New York (etc.): Oxford University Press, 11-19.
  1473. Weitz, Shirley 1974c. Paralanguage. In: Weitz, Shirley (ed.), Nonverbal communication: readings with commentary. New York (etc.): Oxford University Press, 93-98.
  1474. Weitz, Shirley 1974d. Body movements and gestures. In: Weitz, Shirley (ed.), Nonverbal communication: readings with commentary. New York (etc.): Oxford University Press, 127-133.
  1475. Kendon, Adam 1974. Movement Coordination in Social Interaction: Some Examples Described. In: Weitz, Shirley (ed.), Nonverbal communication: readings with commentary. New York (etc.): Oxford University Press, 150-168.
  1476. Dittmann, Allen T. 1974. The Body Movement-Speech Rhythm Relationship as a Cue to Speech Encoding. In: Weitz, Shirley (ed.), Nonverbal communication: readings with commentary. New York (etc.): Oxford University Press, 169-181.
  1477. Scheflen, Albert E. 1974. Quasi-Courtship Behavior in Psychotherapy. In: Weitz, Shirley (ed.), Nonverbal communication: readings with commentary. New York (etc.): Oxford University Press, 182-198.
  1478. Weitz, Shirley 1974e. Spatial behavior. In: Weitz, Shirley (ed.), Nonverbal communication: readings with commentary. New York (etc.): Oxford University Press, 199-204.
  1479. Weitz, Shirley 1974f. Multichannel communication. In: Weitz, Shirley (ed.), Nonverbal communication: readings with commentary. New York (etc.): Oxford University Press, 263-268.
  1480. Harrison, Randall P. 1974. Beyond Words: An Introduction to Nonverbal Communication. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall.
  1481. Feibleman, James K. 1950. The Art of the Dance. The Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism 8(1): 47-52.
  1482. Cohen, Selma Jeanne 1953. Dance as an Art of Imitation. The Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism 23(2): 232-236.
  1483. Foregger, Nikolai 1975. Experiments in the Art of the Dance. Translated by David Miller. The Drama Review: TDR 19(1): 74-77.
  1484. Sparshott, Francis 1983. The Missing Art of Dance. Dance Chronicle 6(2): 164-183.
  1485. Ruyter, Nancy Chalfa 1973. American Delsartism: Precursor of an American Dance Art. Educational Theatre Journal 25(4): 420-435.
  1486. Arnold, Peter J. 1995. Objectivity, Expression, and Communication in Dance as a Performing Art. Journal of Aesthetic Education 29(1): 61-68.
  1487. Arnold, Peter J. 2000. Aspects of the Dancer's Role in the Art of Dance. Journal of Aesthetic Education 34(1): 87-95.
  1488. Davis, Flora 1973. Inside intuition: what we know about nonverbal communication. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  1489. Eco, Umberto 1984. The Role of the Reader: Explorations in the Semiotics of Texts. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
  1490. Harper, Robert G., Arthur N. Wiens, and Joseph D. Matarazzo (Eds.) 1978. Nonverbal communication: the state of the art. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
  1491. Key, Mary Ritchie 1979. Review of Robert G. Harper, Arthur N. Wiens & Joseph D. Matarazzo, Non-verbal communication: The state of the art and Marianne LaFrance & Clara Mayo, Moving bodies: Non-verbal communication in social relationships. Language in Society 8(2-3): 444-447.
  1492. Wichester, Hilary, P. M., Lily Kong and Kevin C. Dunn 2003. Landscapes: Ways of imagining the world. Harlow: Pearson Education Limited.
  1493. Andrews, Edna 2003. Conversations with Lotman: Cultural Semiotics in Language, Literature, and Cognition. Toronto (etc.): University of Toronto Press.
  1494. Matejka, L. et al. (Ed.) 1977. Readings in Soviet semiotics (Russian Texts). Edited, with a Foreword and Commentaries by L. Matejka, S. Shishkoff, M. E. Suino and I. R. Titunik. Ann Arbor: Michigan Slavic Publications.
  1495. Blacking, John 1977b. Towards an Anthropology of the Body. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 1-28.
  1496. Huxley, Francis 1977. The Body and the Play within the Play. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 29-38.
  1497. Ekman, Paul 1977. Biological and Cultural Contributions to Body and Facial Movement. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 39-84.
  1498. Polunin, Ivan 1977. The Body as an Indicator of Health and Disease. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 85-98.
  1499. Strathern, Andrew 1977. Why is Shame on the Skin?. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 99-110.
  1500. Lewis, Gilbert 1977. Fear of Sorcery and the Problem of Death by Suggestion. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 111-144.
  1501. Skultans, Vieda 1977. Bodily Madness and the Spread of the Blush. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 145-160.
  1502. Loudon, J. B. 1977. On Body Products. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 161-178.
  1503. Arnold, Katherine 1977. The Introduction of Poses to a Peruvian Brother and Changing Images of Male and Female. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 179-198.
  1504. Hanna, Judith Lynne 1977. To Dance is Human. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 211-232.
  1505. Lange, Roderyk 1977. Some Notes on the Anthropology of Dance. In: Blacking, John (ed.), The Anthropology of the Body. London (etc.): Academic Press, 241-252.
  1506. Burgoon, Judee K., and Thomas Saine 1978. The Unspoken Dialogue: An Introduction to Nonverbal Communication. Boston (etc.): Houghton Mifflin Company.
  1507. Lotman, Iu. M. 1976b. Theater and theatricality in the order of early nineteenth century culture. In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 33–63.
  1508. Uspenskii, B. A. 1976. Historia sub Specie Semioticae. In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 64-75.
  1509. Meletinskii, E. M. 1976. Primitive sources of verbal art. In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 87-152.
  1510. Meletenskii, E. M. 1976b. A structural-typological analysis of Paleo-Asiatic mythology. In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 153-183.
  1511. Toporov, V. N. 1976b. Toward the origin of certain poetic symbols: the Paleolithic Period. In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 184-225.
  1512. Revzina, O. G. and Revzin, I. I. 1976. Toward formal analysis of plot construction. In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 244-256.
  1513. Lotman, Iu. M. 1976c. O. M. Freidenberg as a student of culture. In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 257–268.
  1514. Bakhtin, M. M. 1976. The art of the word and the culture of folk humor (Rabelais and Gogol'). In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 284-296.
  1515. Lotman, Iu. M. 1976d. Gogol’ and the correlation of "the culture of humor" with the comic and serious in the Russian national tradition. In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 297–300.
  1516. Lotman, Iu. M. 1976e. On the reduction and unfolding of sign systems (The problem of “Freudianism and semiotic culturology”). In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 301–309.
  1517. Ivanov, V. V. 1976b. The significance of M. M. Bakhtin's ideas of sign, utterance, and dialogue for modern semiotics. In: Baran, Henryk (ed.), Semiotics and Structuralism: Readings from the Soviet Union. White Plains (N.Y.): International Arts and Sciences Press, 310-367.
  1518. Greimas, Algirdas Julien 1982. Semiotics and Language: An Analytical Dictionary. Translated by J. Courtés. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
  1519. Portch, Stephen R. 1985. Literature's Silent Language: Nonverbal Communication. American University Studies, Vol 19. New York: Peter Lang.
  1520. Pechey, Graham 2007. Mikhail Bakhtin: the word in the world. London; New York: Routledge.
  1521. Alumäe, Helen, Anu Printsman & Hannes Palang 2003. Cultural and historical values in landscape planning: locals' perception. In: Hannes Palang & Gary Fry (Eds.), Landscape Interfaces: Cultural Heritage in Changing Landscapes. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 125-145.
  1522. Bunkse, Edmunds 2004. Softly Heaves the Glassy Sea: Nature's Rhythms in an Era of Displacement. In: Tom Mels (Ed.), Reanimating Places. A Geography of Rhythms. Aldershot: Ashgate Publishing Company, 71-85.
  1523. Certeau, Michel de 1984. The Practice of Everyday Life. Berkeley: University of California Press.
  1524. Lukes, Steven 2005. Power: A Radical View. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
  1525. Lash, Scott 2007. Power after Hegemony: Culture Studies in Mutation? Theory Culture Society 24(3): 55-78.
  1526. Lotman, Jurij 1977. The Structure of the Artistic Text. Translated from the Russian by Gail Lenhoff and Ronald Vroon. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
  1527. Nauta, Doede, Jr. 1972. The meaning of information. The Hague; Paris: Mouton.
  1528. Goffman, Erving 1974[1955]. On Face-Work: An Analysis of Ritual Elements in Social Interaction. In: Ben G. Blount (Ed.), Language, Culture and Society: A Book of Readings. Cambridge, MA: Winthrop Publishers, Inc., 224-249
  1529. Birringer, Johannes 1991. Video Art / Performance: A Border Theory. Performing Arts Journal 13(3): 54-84.
  1530. Jay, Martin 2002. Somaesthetics and Democracy: Dewey and Contemporary Body Art. Journal of Aesthetic Education 36(4): 55-69.
  1531. Abramović, Marina, Chris Thompson and Katarina Weslien 2006. Pure Raw: Performance, Pedagogy, and (Re)presentaiton. PAJ: A Journal of Performance and Art 28(1): 29-50.
  1532. Keidan, Lois and Daniel Brine 2005. Live Art in London. PAJ: A Journal of Performance and Art 27(3): 74-82.
  1533. Phelan, Peggy 2004. Marina Abramović: Witnessing Shadows. Theatre Journal 56(4): 569-577.
  1534. Cheng, Meiling 2001. Cyborgs in Mutation: Osseus Labyrint's Alien Body Art. TDR 45(2): 145-168.
  1535. Graver, David 1995. Violent Theatricality: Displayed Enactments of Aggression and Pain. Theatre Journal 47(1): 43-64.
  1536. Bishop, Claire 2004. Antagonism and Relational Aesthetics. October 110: 51-79.
  1537. Dickie, George 1975. What Is Anti-Art? The Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism 33(4): 419-421.
  1538. Scalafani, Richard J. 1975. What Kind of Nonsense Is This? The Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism 33(4): 455-458.
  1539. Acconci, Vito 1991. Some Notes on Illegality in Art. Art Journal 50(3): 69-74.
  1540. Judson, William D. 1995. Bill Viola: Allegories in Subjective Perception. Art Journal 54(4): 30-35.
  1541. Wilson, Martha 1997. Performance Art: (Some) Theory and (Selected) Practice at the End of This Century. Art Journal 56(4): 2-3.
  1542. Ward, Frazer 1997. Some Relations between Conceptual and Performance Art. Art Journal 56(4): 36-40.
  1543. Wagner, Anne M. 2000. Performance, Video, and the Rhetoric of Presence. October 91: 59-80.
  1544. Dworkin, Craig Douglas 2001. Fugitive Signs. October 95: 90-113.
  1545. Foucault, Michel 1986. Of Other Spaces. Translated by Jay Miskowiec. Diacritics 16(1): 22-27.
  1546. Foucault, Michel 1982. The Subject and Power. Critical Inquiry 8(4): 777-795.
  1547. Foucault, Michel 1995. Madness, the absence of Work. Translated by Peter Stastny and Deniz Şengel. Critical Inquiry 21(2): 290-298.
  1548. Foucault, Michel 2009. Alternatives to the Prison: Dissemination or Decline of Social Control? Translated by Couze Venn. Theory Culture Society 26(6): 12-24.
  1549. Foucault, Michel 2003. Society Must Be Defended: Lectures at the Collège de France, 1975‐1976. Translated by David Macey. New York: Picador.
  1550. Foucault, Michel 2009. Security, Territory, Population: Lectures at the Collège de France 1977-1978. Translated by Graham Burchell. New York: Picador.
  1551. Davidson, Arnold I. 2011. In praise of counter-conduct. History of the Human Sciences 24(4): 25-41.
  1552. Venn, Couze 2007. Culture Theory, Biopolitics, and the Question of Power. Theory Culture Society 24(3): 111-124.
  1553. Foucault, Michel 1980. Power/knowledge: selected interviews and other writings 1972-1977. Translated and edited by Colin Gordon et al.. New York: Pantheon Books.
  1554. Punday, Daniel 2000. Foucault's Body Tropes. New Literary History 31(3): 509-528.
  1555. Odum, Eugene P. 1968. Energy Flow in Ecosystems: A Histprocal Review. American Zoologist 8(1): 11-18.
  1556. Odum, Eugene P. 1976. Energy, Ecosystem Development and Environmental Risk. The Journal of Risk and Insurance 43(1): 1-16.
  1557. Fuchs, Stephan 1989. On the Microfoundations of Macrosociology: A Critique of Microsociological Reductionism. Sociological Perspectives 32(2): 169-182.
  1558. Lukes, Steven 1968. Methodological Individualism Reconsidered. The British Journal of Sociology 19(2): 119-129.
  1559. Watkins, J. W. N. 1955. Methodological Individualism: A Reply. Philosophy of Science 22(1): 58-62.
  1560. Miller, Richard W. 1978. Methodological Individualism and Social Explanation. Philosophy of Science 45(3): 387-414.
  1561. Arrow, Kenneth J. 1994. Methodological Individualism and Social Knowledge. The American Economic Review 82(2): 1-9.
  1562. Burnham, Linda Rye 1986. "High Performance," Performance Art, and Me. The Drama Review: TDR 30(1): 15-51.
  1563. Blau, Herbert 1991. The Surpassing Body. TDR 35(2): 74-98.
  1564. Novakov, Anna 2003. Point of Access: Marina Abramovic's 1975 Performance "Role Exchange". Woman's Art Journal 24(2): 31-35.
  1565. Rush, Michael 1999. A Noisy Silence. PAJ: A Journal of Performance and Art 21(1): 2-10.
  1566. Abram, David 1997. The Spell of the Sensuous: Perception and Language in a More-Than-Human World. New York: Vintage Books.
  1567. Moran, Emilio F. 1984a. Limitations and Advances in Ecosystems Research. In: Emilio F. Moran (Ed.), The Ecosystem Concept in Anthropology. Boulder: Westview Press, 3-32.
  1568. Golley, Frank B. 1984. Historical Origins of the Ecosystem Concept in Biology. In: Emilio F. Moran (Ed.), The Ecosystem Concept in Anthropology. Boulder: Westview Press, 33-50.
  1569. Moran, Emilio F. 1984b. The Problem of Analytical Level Shifting in Amazonian Ecosystem Research. In: Emilio F. Moran (Ed.), The Ecosystem Concept in Anthropology. Boulder: Westview Press, 265-288.
  1570. Ott, Margus 2012. Hõiva! Vikerkaar 2012(6): 45-59.
  1571. Mouffe, Chantal 2012. Kui tähtis on sidumus riigiga. Vikerkaar 2012(6): 70-77.
  1572. Zarilli, Philip B. 1984. "Doing the Exercise": The In-Body Transmission of Performance Knowledge in Traditional Martial Art. Asian Theatre Journal 1(2): 191-206.
  1573. Elsenaar, Arthur and Remko Scha 2002. Electric Body Manipulation as Performance Art: A Historical Perspective. Leonardo Music Journal 12: 17-28.
  1574. Cohen, Sarah R. Body as "Character" in Early Eighteenth-Century French Art and Performance. The Art Bulletin 78(3): 454-466.
  1575. Green, Gaye Leigh 1999. The Return of the Body: Performance Art and Art Education. Art Education 52(1): 6-12.
  1576. Mouffe, Chantal 1992. Citizenship and Political Identity. October 61: 28-32.
  1577. Mouffe, Chantal, Rosalyn Deutsche, Branden W. Joseph and Thomas Keenan 2001. Every Form of Art Has a Political Dimension. Grey Room 2: 98-125.
  1578. Tulloch, John C. 1976. Sociology of Knowledge and the Sociology of Literature. The British Journal of Sociology 27(2): 197-210.
  1579. Jakobson, R., Ju. Tynjanov and H. Eagle 1980. Problems in the Study of Language and Literature. Poetics Today 2(1): 29-31.
  1580. Manning, Peter K. 1973. Existential Sociology. The Sociological Quarterly 14(2): 200-225.
  1581. Barton, Michael 1982. The Study of American Everyday Life. American Quarterly 34(3): 218-221.
  1582. Mills, Trudy and Sherryl Kleinman 1988. Emotions, Reflexivity, and Action: An Interactionist Analysis. Social Forces 66(4): 1009-1027.
  1583. Shokeid, Moshe 1992. Exceptional Experiences in Everyday Life. Cultural Anthropology 7(2): 232-243.
  1584. Mitchell, Timothy 1990. Everyday Metaphors of Power. Theory and Society 19(5): 545-577.
  1585. Jones, Amelia 1997. "Presence" in Absentia: Experiencing Performance as Documentation. Art Journal 56(4): 11-18.
  1586. Fisher, Jennifer 1997. Interperformance: The Live Tableaux of Suzanne Lacy, Janine Antoni, and Marina Abramovic. Art Journal 56(4): 28-33.
  1587. Kaplan, Janet A. 1999. Deeper and Deeper: Interview with Marina Abramovic. Art Journal 58(2): 6-21.
  1588. Green, Charles 2000. Doppelgangers and the Third Force: The Artistic Collaborations of Gilbert & George and Marina Abramovic/Ulay. Art Journal 59(2): 36-45.
  1589. Uspenskij, B. A., V. V. Ivanov, V. N. Toporov, A. M. Pjatigorskij, Ju. M. Lotman 1998[1973]. Theses on the Semiotic Study of Cultures (As Applied to Slavic Texts). In: Ülle Pärli (Ed.), Theses on the semiotic study of cultures. Translated by Silvi Salupere. Tartu: University of Tartu, 33-60.
  1590. Caldwell, Pheobe and Jane Horwood 2007. From Isolation to Intimacy: Making Friends without Words. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers.
  1591. Devereux, Godfrey 1994. The Elements of Yoga. Shaftesbury: Element.
  1592. Gregory, Richard L. 1970. The intelligent eye. New York: McGraw-Hill Book.
  1593. Althusser, Louis 2000[1971]. Ideology interpellates individuals as subjects. In: Paul du Gay, Peter Redman, Jessica Evans (Eds.), Identity: A Reader. London, Sage/The Open University, 31-38.
  1594. Benveniste, Emile 2000[1971]. Subjectivity in language. In: Paul du Gay, Peter Redman, Jessica Evans (Eds.), Identity: A Reader. London, Sage/The Open University, 39-43.
  1595. Widgren, Mats 2004. Can landscapes be read? In: Hannes Palang, Helen Sooväli, Marc Antrop, Gunhild Setten (eds), European cultural landscapes: persistence and change in a globalising environment. Dordrecht: Kluwer, 455-466.
  1596. Krull, Hasso 2011. Mis on luule? Vikerkaar 2011(7-8).
  1597. Eliot, T.S. 1982[1919]. Tradition and the Individual Talent. Perspecta 19: 36-42.
  1598. Elsaesser, Thomas 2009. Between Erlebnis and Erfahrung: Cinema Experience with Benjamin. Paragraph 32(3): 292-312.
  1599. Rogers, Mary F. 1984. Everyday Life as Text. Sociological Theory 2: 165-186.
  1600. Adler, Patricia A., Peter Adler and Adrea Fontana 1987. Everyday Life Sociology. Annual Review of Sociology 13: 217-235.
  1601. Shott, Susan 1979. Emotion and social life: A symbolic interactionist analysis. The American Journal of Sociology 84(6): 1317-1334.
  1602. Baldwin, John D. 1988. Habit, Emotion, and Self-Conscious Action. Sociological Perspectives 31(1): 35-57.
  1603. Collins, Randall 1981. On the Microfoundations of Macrosociology. American Journal of Sociology 86(5): 984-1014.
  1604. Lotman, Yuri M. 1990. Universe of the mind: a semiotic theory of culture. Translated by Ann Shukman; introduction by Umberto Eco. London; New York: I.B. Tauris.
  1605. McLaughlin, Paul 2012. Radicalism: a philosophical study. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
  1606. Schmitt, Carl 1996. The Concept of Political. Translation, introduction, and notes by George Schwab; with Leo Strauss's notes on Schmitt's essay; translated by J. Harvey Lomax; foreword by Tracy Strong. Chicago; London: The University of Chicago Press.
  1607. Eco, Umberto 1983. Does Counter-culture Exist? Translated by Jenny Condie. In: Robert Lumley (Ed.), Apocalypse Postponed. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 115-128.
  1608. Mauss, Marcel 1973. The Techniques of the Body. Economy and Society 2(1): 70-88.
  1609. Shklovsky, Victor 1994. Art as Technique. In: D. Lodge (Ed.), Modern Criticism and Theory: A Reader. London; New York: Longman, 16-30.
  1610. Hardesty, Donald L. 1972. The human ecological niche. American Anthropologist 74(3): 458-466.
  1611. Patrick, Ruth 2000. Biological diversity in ecology. In: Keller, David R. and Frank B. Golley (eds.), The Philosophy of Ecology: From Science to Synthesis. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 119-123.
  1612. Patten, Bernard C. and Eugene P. Odum 1981. The cybernetic nature of ecosystems. The American Naturalist 118(6): 886-895.
  1613. Wegner, Daniel M. 2006. Self is Magic. In: Baer, John; James C. Kaufman and Roy F. Baumeister (Eds.), Are We Free?: Psychology and Free Will. New York: Oxford University Press, 226-247.
  1614. Reicher, Stephen 2004. The Context of Social Identity: Domination, Resistance, and Change. Political Psychology 25(6): 921-945.
  1615. Butler, Judith 2004. Bodies and Power Revisited. In: Dianna Taylor and Karen Vintges (Eds.), Feminism and the Final Foucault. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 183-194.
  1616. Butler, Judith 1989. Foucault and the Paradox of Bodily Inscriptions. The Journal of Philosophy 86(11): 601-607.
  1617. Iedema, Rick 2003. Multimodality, resemiotization: extending the analysis of discourse as multi-semiotic practice. Visual Communication 2(1): 29-57.
  1618. Koch, Sigmund 1974. Psychology and Emerging Conceptions of Knowledge as Unitary. In: T. W. Wann (ed.), Behaviorism and phenomenology: contrasting bases for modern psychology. Chicago; London: University of Chicago Press, 1-41
  1619. MacLeod, R. B. 1974. Phenomenology: A Challenge to Experimental Psychology. In: T. W. Wann (ed.), Behaviorism and phenomenology: contrasting bases for modern psychology. Chicago; London: University of Chicago Press, 47-73
  1620. Skinner, B. F. 1974. Behaviorism at Fifty. In: T. W. Wann (ed.), Behaviorism and phenomenology: contrasting bases for modern psychology. Chicago; London: University of Chicago Press, 79-97.
  1621. Rogers, Carl R. 1974. Toward a Science of the Person. In: T. W. Wann (ed.), Behaviorism and phenomenology: contrasting bases for modern psychology. Chicago; London: University of Chicago Press, 109-133.
  1622. Scriven, Michael 1974. Views of Human Nature. In: T. W. Wann (ed.), Behaviorism and phenomenology: contrasting bases for modern psychology. Chicago; London: University of Chicago Press, 163-183.
  1623. Danesi, Marcel 1998. The body in the sign: Thomas A. Sebeok and semiotics. Ottawa: Legas.
  1624. Coleman, James C. 1949. Facial expressions of emotion. Washington: American Psychological Association.
  1625. Reichenbach, Hans 1957. The rise of scientific philosophy. Berkeley; Los Angeles: University of California Press.
  1626. Jackson, B. Darrel 1969. The Theory of Signs in St. Augustine's De doctrina christiana. Revue des Études Augustiniennes 15: 9-49.
  1627. Biedarieva, Svitlana 2010. Reflections in the Umwelt. Hortus Semioticus 6: 53-58.
  1628. Cherry, Colin 1977[1957]. On human communication: a review, a survey, and a criticism. 2nd ed. Cambridge; London: MIT Press.
  1629. Deely, John N. 2010. Semiotics seen synchronically: the view from 2010. New York: Legas.
  1630. Austin, John L. 1970. Sense and sensibilia. Reconstructed from the manuscript notes by C. J. Warnock. London: Oxford University Press.
  1631. Lee, Dorothy 1959. Freedom and Culture. Hemel Hempstead: Prentice Hall.
  1632. Scarry, Elaine 1985. The Body in Pain: the making and umaking of the world. Oxford; New York: Oxford University Press.
  1633. Walzer, Michael 1997. On Toleration. New Haven; London: Yale University Press.
  1634. Hollywood, John and Diane Synder, Kenneth McKay, John Boon 2004. Out of the Ordinary: finding hidden threats by analyzing unusual behavior. Santa Monica: RAND.
  1635. Kleinke, Chris L. 1975. First Impressions: the psychology of encountering others. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall.
  1636. Heath, Christian 1986. Body Movement and Speech in Medical Interaction. Illustrated by Katherine Nicholls. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
  1637. Mead, George Herbert 1970. Mind, Self, and Society: From the Standpoint of a Social Behaviorist. Edited and with an introduction by Charles W. Morris. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
  1638. Merrell, Floyd 2010. Entangling Forms: Within Semiosic Processes. Berlin; New York: De Gruyter Mouton.
  1639. Fry, Dennis 1977. Homo Loquens: Man as a Talking Animal. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
  1640. Laver, John and Sandy Hutcheson 1972. Introduction. In: Laver, John and Sandy Hutcheson (eds.), Communication in Face to Face Interaction: Selected Readings. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 11-14.
  1641. Argyle, M. and A. Kendon 1972. The Experimental Analysis of Social Performance. In: Laver, John and Sandy Hutcheson (eds.), Communication in Face to Face Interaction: Selected Readings. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 19-63.
  1642. Abercrombie, D. 1972. Paralanguage. In: Laver, John and Sandy Hutcheson (eds.), Communication in Face to Face Interaction: Selected Readings. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 64-70.
  1643. Birdwhistell, R. L. 1972. Paralanguage Twenty-five Years after Sapir. In: Laver, John and Sandy Hutcheson (eds.), Communication in Face to Face Interaction: Selected Readings. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 82-100.
  1644. Malinowski, B. 1972. Phatic Communication. In: Laver, John and Sandy Hutcheson (eds.), Communication in Face to Face Interaction: Selected Readings. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 146-152.
  1645. La Barre, Weston 1972. The Cultural Basis of Emotions and Gestures. In: Laver, John and Sandy Hutcheson (eds.), Communication in Face to Face Interaction: Selected Readings. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 207-224.
  1646. Scheflen, A. E. 1972. The Significance of Posture in Communication systems. In: Laver, John and Sandy Hutcheson (eds.), Communication in Face to Face Interaction: Selected Readings. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 225-246.
  1647. Mehrabian, Albert 1973a. A Semantic Space for Nonverbal Behavior. In: Mortensen, David C. and Kenneth K. Sereno (eds.), Advances in Communication Research. New York: Harper & Row, 277-287.
  1648. Mehrabian, Albert 1973b. Significance of Posture and Position in the Communication of Attitude and Status Relationships. In: Mortensen, David C. and Kenneth K. Sereno (eds.), Advances in Communication Research. New York: Harper & Row, 288-303.
  1649. Davitz, Joel R. 1964b. A review of research concerned with facial and vocal expression of emotion. In: Davitz, Joel R. (ed.), The Communication of Emotional Meaning. New York: McGraw-Hill, 13-30.
  1650. Beldoch, Michael 1964. Sensivity to Emotional expression in three modes of communication. In: Davitz, Joel R. (ed.), The Communication of Emotional Meaning. New York: McGraw-Hill, 31-42.
  1651. Davitz, Joel R. 1964d. Personality, perceptual, and cognitive correlates of emotional sensitivity. In: Davitz, Joel R. (ed.), The Communication of Emotional Meaning. New York: McGraw-Hill, 57-68.
  1652. Dimitrovsky, Lilly 1964. The ability to identify the emotional meaning of vocal expressions at successive age levels. In: Davitz, Joel R. (ed.), The Communication of Emotional Meaning. New York: McGraw-Hill, 69-86.
  1653. Davitz, Joel R. 1964d. Auditory Correlates of vocal expressions of emotional meanings. In: Davitz, Joel R. (ed.), The Communication of Emotional Meaning. New York: McGraw-Hill, 101-112.
  1654. Blau, Sidney 1964. An ear for an eye: sensory compensation and judments of affect by the blind. In: Davitz, Joel R. (ed.), The Communication of Emotional Meaning. New York: McGraw-Hill, 113-128.
  1655. Turner, John le B. 1964. Schizophrenics as judges of vocal expressions of emotional meaning. In: Davitz, Joel R. (ed.), The Communication of Emotional Meaning. New York: McGraw-Hill, 129-142.
  1656. Davitz, Joel R. 1964e. Minor studies and some hypotheses. In: Davitz, Joel R. (ed.), The Communication of Emotional Meaning. New York: McGraw-Hill, 143-156.
  1657. Davitz, Joel R. and Steven Mattis 1964. The communication of emotional meaning by metaphor. In: Davitz, Joel R. (ed.), The Communication of Emotional Meaning. New York: McGraw-Hill, 157-176.
  1658. Davitz, Joel R. 1964f. Summary and speculations. In: Davitz, Joel R. (ed.), The Communication of Emotional Meaning. New York: McGraw-Hill, 177-202.
  1659. Mathiesen, Thomas 1974. The Politics of Abolition: Essays in Political Action Theory. Scandinavian Studies in Criminology, Volume 4. Oslo: Universitetsforlaget.
  1660. Hewitt, John P. 1979. Self and Society: A Symbolic Interactionist Social Psychology. 2nd ed. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
  1661. Bauman, Zygmunt 1973. Culture as Praxis. London; Boston: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
  1662. Lotman, Juri 2009. Culture and Explosion. Edited by Marina Grishakova; translated by Wilma Clark. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter.
  1663. Uspenski, Boriss 1983. A Poetics of Composition: The Structure of the Artistic Text and Typology of a Compositional Form. Translated by Valentina Zavarin and Susan Wittig. Berkeley: University of California Press.
  1664. Waldstein, Maxim 2008. The Soviet Empire of Signs: A History of the Tartu School of Semiotics. Saarbrüchen: VDM Verlag.
  1665. Winner, Thomas G. 1979. Some Fundamental Concepts Leading to a Semiotics of Culture: An Historical Overview. Portis-Winner, Irene and Jean Umiker-Sebeok (eds.), Semiotics of Culture: A Special Issue of Semiotica. Paris; New York: Monton, 75-82.
  1666. Portis-Winner, Irene 2002. Semiotics of Peasants in Transition: Slovene Villagers and Their Ethnic Relatives in America. Durham: Duke University Press Books.
  1667. Lotman, Michail 2000. A Few Notes on the Philosophical Background of the Tartu School of Semiotics. European Journal for Semiotic Studies 12(1): 23-46.
  1668. Lotman, J. M. 1975[1973]. The Discrete Text and the Iconic Text: Remarks on the Structure of Narrative. Translated by Frances Pfotenhauer. New Literary History 6(2): 333-338.
  1669. Lotman, Yuri M. 1990. Universe of The Mind: A Semiotic Theory of Culture. Translated by Ann Shukman. Introduction by Umberto Eco. London; New York: Tauris.
  1670. Veltruský, Jiří 1981. The Prague School Theory of Theater. Poetics Today 2(3): 225-235.
  1671. Veltruský, Jiří 1987. Structure in Folk Theater: Notes Regarding Bogatyrev's Book on Czech and Slovak Folk Theater. Poetics Today 8(1): 141-161.
  1672. Honzl, Jindřich 1976[1940]. Dynamics of the Sign in the Theater. Matejka, Ladislav and Irwin R. Titunik (eds.), Semiotics of Art. Cambridge: MIT Press, 75-94.
  1673. Mukařovský, Jan 1978. Structure, Sign and Function: Selected Essays. Translated and edited by John Burbank and Peter Steiner. New Haven: Yale University Press.
  1674. Lotman, Juri and B. A. Uspensky 1978. Myth — Name — Culture. Semiotica 22(3): 211-233.
  1675. Lotman, Juri 1976. Semiotics of Cinema. Translated by Mark E. Suino. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
  1676. Tynjanov, Yuri 1977. The Fundamentals of Cinema. In: O'Toole, L. M. and Ann Shukman (eds.), Formalist Theory. Oxford: Holdan Books, 32-54.
  1677. Kull, Kalevi 1999. Towards biosemiotics with Yuri Lotman. Semiotica 127(1): 115-131.
  1678. Ivanov, Vyacheslav V. 2008. Semiotics of the 20th century. Sign Systems Studies 36(1): 185-230.
  1679. Saussure, Ferdinand De 2007[1972]. Course in General Linguistics. Edited by Charles Bally and Albert Sechehaye. Translated by Roy Harris. Illinois: Open Court.
  1680. Bazin, André 1997a. Filmikeele areng I. Teater. Muusika. Kino. 10: 44-47.
  1681. Metz, Christian 1974. Language and Cinema. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.
  1682. Metz, Christian 1990[1978]. Film Language: A Semiotics of the Cinema. Translated by Michael Taylor. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
  1683. Barthes, Roland 1977. Image, Music, Text. Edited and translated by Stephen Heath. New York: Hill.
  1684. Burch, Noël 1982. Narrative/Diegesis: Thresholds, Limits. Screen 23(2): 16-33.
  1685. Comolli, Jean-Louis 1986[1971]. Technique and Ideology: Camera, Perspective, Depth of Field (Parts Three and Four). In: Erens, Patricia and Philip Rosen (eds.), Narrative, Apparatus, Ideology: A Film Theory Reader. New York: Columbia University Press, 421-443.
  1686. Bourdieu, Pierre 1990[1980]. The Logic of Practice. Translated by Richard Nice. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
  1687. Jensen, Klaus Bruhn 1995. The Social Semiotics of Mass Communication. London: Sage Publishing.
  1688. Leeds-Hurwitz, Wendy 1993. Semiotics and Communication: Signs, Codes, Cultures. Hillsdale: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
  1689. Holý, Ladislav and Milan Stuchlík 1983. Actions, Norms and Representations: Foundations of Anthropological Inquiry. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
  1690. Berger, Peter L. and Thomas Luckmann 1966. The Social Construction of Reality: A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge. New York: Doubleday.
  1691. Taylor, Paul W. 2005[1981]. The Ethics of Respect for Nature. In: Zimmerman, Michael E. et. al. (eds.), Environmental Philosophy: From Animal Rights to Radical Ecology. 4th edition. Upper Saddle River: Pearson Education, 67-81.
  1692. Rolston, Holmes III 2005[1991]. Challenges in Environmental ethics. In: Zimmerman, Michael E. et. al. (eds.), Environmental Philosophy: From Animal Rights to Radical Ecology. 4th edition. Upper Saddle River: Pearson Education, 82-101.
  1693. Leopold, Aldo 2005[1949]. The Land Ethic. In: Zimmerman, Michael E. et. al. (eds.), Environmental Philosophy: From Animal Rights to Radical Ecology. 4th edition. Upper Saddle River: Pearson Education, 102-115.
  1694. Calliott, J Baird 2005[1999]. Holistic Environmental Ethics and the Problem of Ecofascism. In: Zimmerman, Michael E. et. al. (eds.), Environmental Philosophy: From Animal Rights to Radical Ecology. 4th edition. Upper Saddle River: Pearson Education, 116-129.
  1695. Gaard, Greta and Lori Gruen 2005. Ecofeminism: Toward Global Justice and Planetary Health. In: Zimmerman, Michael E. et. al. (eds.), Environmental Philosophy: From Animal Rights to Radical Ecology. 4th edition. Upper Saddle River: Pearson Education, 155-177.
  1696. Shiva, Vandana 2005[1993]. The Impoverishment of the Environment: Women and Children Last. In: Zimmerman, Michael E. et. al. (eds.), Environmental Philosophy: From Animal Rights to Radical Ecology. 4th edition. Upper Saddle River: Pearson Education, 178-193.
  1697. Warren, Karen J 2005. The Power and the Promise of Ecofeminism, Revisited. In: Zimmerman, Michael E. et. al. (eds.), Environmental Philosophy: From Animal Rights to Radical Ecology. 4th edition. Upper Saddle River: Pearson Education, 252-279.
  1698. Poyatos, Fernando 2008. Textual Translation and Live Translation: The total experience of nonverbal communication in literature, theater and cinema. Amsterdam: John Benjamins Publishing Company.
  1699. Henley, Nancy M. 1977. Body Politics: Power, sex and nonverbal communication. Drawings by D. Patrick. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc.
  1700. Bookchin, Murray 2005. The Ecology of Freedom: The emergence and dissolution of hierarchy. Oakland, California: AK Press.
  1701. Lukes, Steven 2005. Power: A Radical View. Second Edition. Basingstoke; New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
  1702. Győrfi, Tamás 2009. The Importance of Freedom of Assembly: Three Models of Justification. In: Sajó, András (ed.), Free to Protest: Constituent Power and Street Demonstration. Utrecht: Eleven International Publishing, 1-15.
  1703. Iancu, Bogdan 2009. Balancing Emotionalism: Contemporary Implicatons of the Impact of Street Demonstrations on Third-Party Interests. In: Sajó, András (ed.), Free to Protest: Constituent Power and Street Demonstration. Utrecht: Eleven International Publishing, 17-40.
  1704. Gargarella, Roberto 2009. A Dialogue on Law and Social Protests. In: Sajó, András (ed.), Free to Protest: Constituent Power and Street Demonstration. Utrecht: Eleven International Publishing, 61-86.
  1705. Smilov, Daniel 2009. The Power of Assembled People: The Right to Assembly and Political Representation. In: Sajó, András (ed.), Free to Protest: Constituent Power and Street Demonstration. Utrecht: Eleven International Publishing, 87-104.
  1706. Scheflen, Albert Edward and Alice Scheflen 1972. Body Language and Social Order: Communication as behavioral control. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall.
  1707. Quirk, Joe 2006. It's Not You, It's Biology: The Science of Love, Sex and Relationships. Philadelphia: Running Press.
  1708. Aldrete, Gregory S. 1999. Gestures and Acclamations in Ancient Rome. Baltimore and London: The Johns Hopkins University Press.
  1709. Milstein, Cindy 2010. Anarchism and Its Aspirations. Oakland: AK Press.
  1710. Goldman, Emma 2003[1969]. Anarchism and Other Essays. With a new introduction by Richard Drinnon. New York: Dover.
  1711. Morris, Charles 1949. Signs, Language and Behavior. New York: Prentice-Hall, Inc.
  1712. Pelc, Jerzy 1997. Understanding, Explanation, and Action as Problems of Semiotics. In: Posner, R., K. Robering, and T.A. Sebeok (eds.), Semiotics: A Handbook on the Sign-Theoretic Foundations of Nature and Culture. Vol. 1. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, 644–667.
  1713. Bakunin, A. Mikhail 2004. Marxism, Freedom And The State. Whitefish: Kessinger Publishing.
  1714. Fishbein, Martin and Icek Ajzen 1975. Belief, Attitude, Intention and Behavior: An Introduction to Theory and Research. Reading: Addison-Wesley.
  1715. Randviir, Anti 2004. Mapping the World: Towards a sociosemiotic approach to culture. Tartu: Tartu University Press.
  1716. Cicourel, Aaron V. 1974. Cognitive Sociology: Language and Meaning in Social Interaction. New York: Free Press.
  1717. Hall, Edward T. 1968[1959]. The Silent Language. Greenwich: Fawcett.
  1718. Goffman, Erving 1959. The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life. New York: Doubleday.
  1719. Goffman, Erving 1966. Behavior in Public Places: Notes on the Social Organization of Gatherings. New York: The Free Press.
  1720. Key, Mary Ritchie 1975. Paralanguage And Kinesics (Nonverbal Communication). Metuchen: The Scarecrow Press, Inc.
  1721. Graeber, David 2004. Fragments of an Anarchist Anthropology. Chicago: Prickly Paradigm Press.
  1722. Lange-Seidl, Annemarie 1977. Approaches to Theories for Nonverbal Signs. Studies in Semiotics, Volume 17. Lisse: The Peter De Ridder Press.
  1723. Ekman, Paul 1973a. Introduction. In: Ekman, Paul (ed.), Darwin and Facial Expression: A Century of Research in Review. New York;London: Academic Press, Inc., 1-10.
  1724. Chevalier-Skolnikoff, Suzanne 1973. Facial Expression of Emotion in Nonhuman Primates. In: Ekman, Paul (ed.), Darwin and Facial Expression: A Century of Research in Review. New York;London: Academic Press, Inc., 11-89.
  1725. Charlesworth, William R. and Mary Anne Kreutzer 1973. Facial Expressions of Infants and Children. In: Ekman, Paul (ed.), Darwin and Facial Expression: A Century of Research in Review. New York;London: Academic Press, Inc., 91-168.
  1726. Ekman, Paul 1973b. Cross-Cultural Studies of Facial Expression. In: Ekman, Paul (ed.), Darwin and Facial Expression: A Century of Research in Review. New York;London: Academic Press, Inc., 169-222.
  1727. Petrinovich, Lewis 1973. Darwin and the Representative Expression of Reality. In: Ekman, Paul (ed.), Darwin and Facial Expression: A Century of Research in Review. New York;London: Academic Press, Inc., 223-256.
  1728. Gramigna, Remo 2011. Augustine On Lying: A Semiotic Analysis. University of Tartu, Department of Semiotics. Unpublished masters thesis.
  1729. Knapp, Mark L. 1972. Nonverbal Communication In Human Interaction. New York (etc.): Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
  1730. Kendon, Adam 1981a. Introduction: Current Issues in the Study of 'Nonverbal Communication'. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 1-53.
  1731. Ekman, P., Friesen, W. V. 1981. The Repertoire of Nonverbal Behavior: Categories, Origins, Usage, and Coding. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 57-105.
  1732. Pyoatos, Gernando 1981b. Forms and Functions of Nonverbal Communication in the Novel: A New Perspective of the Author-Character-Reader Relationship. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 107-149.
  1733. Freedman, Norbert 1981. Toward a Mathematization of Kinetic Behavior: A Review of Paul Bouissac's La Mesure des Geses. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 151-164.
  1734. Collet, P., Marsh, P. 1981. Patterns of Public Behavior: Collision Avoidance on a Pedestrian Crossing. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 199-217.
  1735. Givens, Davis 1981. Greeting a Stranger: Some Commonly Used Nonverbal Signals of Aversiveness. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 219-235.
  1736. Schiffrin, Deborah 1981. Handwork as Ceremony: The Case of the Handshake. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 237-250.
  1737. Beattie, Geoffrey W. 1981. Sequential Temporal Patterns of Speech and Gaze in Dialogue. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 297-320.
  1738. Kendon, Adam 1981b. Some Functions of the Face in a Kissing Round. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 321-356.
  1739. Rosenburg, Marc 1981. The Case of the Apple Turnover: An Experiment in Multichannel Communication Analysis. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 357-368.
  1740. Poyatos, Fernando 1981b. Gesture Inventories: Fieldwork Methodology and Problems. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 371-399.
  1741. Sparhawk, Carol M. 1981. Contrastice-Identificational Features of Persian Gesture. In: Adam Kendon (ed.), Nonverbal Communication, Interaction, and Gesture : Selections from Semiotica. The Hague: Mouton, 421-458.
  1742. Foucault, Michel 2005[1971]. Diskursuse kord: Collége de France'i inaugaratsiooniloeng 2. detsembril 1970. Prantsuse keelest tõlkinud Marek Tamm. Tallinn: Varrak.
  1743. Lorenz, Konrad 1966. On Aggression. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, Inc.
  1744. Darwin, Charles 1998[1872]. The Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals. With an introduction, afterword, and commentaries by Paul Ekman. 3rd edition. New York: Oxford University Press, Inc.
  1745. Ekman, Paul 1998. Introduction to the Third Edition. In: Ekman, Paul (ed.), The Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals. With an introduction, afterword, and commentaries by Paul Ekman. 3rd edition. New York: Oxford University Press, Inc, xxi-xxxvi.
  1746. Sebeok, Thomas A. 2001. The Swiss Pioneer in Nonverbal Communication Studies, Heini Hediger (1908-1992). New York; Ottawa: Legas.
  1747. Sarles, Harvey 1975. Language and Communication-II: The View from '74. In: Pliner, Patricia (ed.), Nonverbal Communication of Aggression. Advances in the Study of Communication and Affect, Vol. 2. New York: Plenum Press, 1-19.
  1748. Exline, Ralph V., Ellyson, Steve L. and Barbara Long 1975. Visual Behavior as an Aspect of Power Role Relationships. In: Pliner, Patricia (ed.), Nonverbal Communication of Aggression. Advances in the Study of Communication and Affect, Vol. 2. New York: Plenum Press, 21-52.
  1749. Ellsworth, Phoebe C. 1975. Direct Gaze as a Social Stimulus: The Example of Aggression. In: Pliner, Patricia (ed.), Nonverbal Communication of Aggression. Advances in the Study of Communication and Affect, Vol. 2. New York: Plenum Press, 53-75.
  1750. Izard, Carroll E. 1975. Patterns of Emotions and Emotion Communication in "Hostility" and Aggression. In: Pliner, Patricia (ed.), Nonverbal Communication of Aggression. Advances in the Study of Communication and Affect, Vol. 2. New York: Plenum Press, 77-101.
  1751. Menzen, E. W. Jr. 1975. Communication and Aggression in a Group of Young Chimpanzees. In: Pliner, Patricia (ed.), Nonverbal Communication of Aggression. Advances in the Study of Communication and Affect, Vol. 2. New York: Plenum Press, 103-133.
  1752. Miller, Robert E. 1975. Nonverbal Expressions of Aggression and Submission in Social Groups of Primates. In: Pliner, Patricia (ed.), Nonverbal Communication of Aggression. Advances in the Study of Communication and Affect, Vol. 2. New York: Plenum Press, 135-160.
  1753. Ginsburg, Benson E. 1975. Nonverbal Communication: The Effects of Affect on Individual and Group Behavior. In: Pliner, Patricia (ed.), Nonverbal Communication of Aggression. Advances in the Study of Communication and Affect, Vol. 2. New York: Plenum Press, 161-173.
  1754. Ratner, Stanley R. 1975. Animal's Defenses: Fighting in Predator-Prey Relations. In: Pliner, Patricia (ed.), Nonverbal Communication of Aggression. Advances in the Study of Communication and Affect, Vol. 2. New York: Plenum Press, 175-190.
  1755. Bauman, Zygmunt 2010[1978]. Hermeneutics and Social Science. New York: Routledge Revivals.
  1756. Tenjes, Silvi 2010. Semantika. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus.
  1757. Õim, Haldur 1974. Semantika. Tallinn: Valgus.
  1758. Lyons, John 1968. Introduction to Theoretical Linguistics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
  1759. Ventsel, Andreas 2009. Towards Semiotic Theory of Hegemony. Tartu University Press.
  1760. Ventsel, Andreas 2007. The construction of the 'we'-category: Political rhetoric in Soviet Estonia from June 1940 to July 1941. Sign System Studies 35(1/2): 249-267.
  1761. Ventsel, Andreas 2009. The role of political rhetoric in the development of Soviet totalitarian language. Russian Journal of Communication 2(1/2): 9-26.
  1762. Lotman, Juri 2010. Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus.
  1763. Lotman, Juri 2004[1973]. Filmisemiootika. Tallinn: Varrak.
  1764. Debord, Guy[1967] 1994. The Society of the Spectacle. New York: Zone Books.
  1765. Cassirer, Ernst 2007[1925]. Keel ja müüt: Täienduseks jumalate nimede probleemile. Tallinn: Eesti Keele Sihtasutus.
  1766. Foucault, Michel 2005. The Hermeneutics of the Subject: Lectures at the Collège de France, 1981-1982. Edited by Frédéric Gros et al.. Translated by Graham Burchell. New York: Picador.
  1767. Butler, Judith P. 1997. Excitable Speech: A politics of the performative. New York: Routledge.
  1768. Elkind, David 1971. Cognitive Crowth Cycles in Mental Development. In: Cole, James K. (ed.), Nebraska Symposium On Motivation, 19. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1-31.
  1769. Mehrabian, Albert 1971. Nonverbal Communication. In: Cole, James K. (ed.), Nebraska Symposium On Motivation, 19. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 107-162.
  1770. Exline, Ralph 1971. Visual Interaction: The Glances of Power and Preference. In: Cole, James K. (ed.), Nebraska Symposium On Motivation, 19. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 163-206.
  1771. Ekman, Paul 1971. Universals and Cultural Differences in Facial Expressions of Emotion. In: Cole, James K. (ed.), Nebraska Symposium On Motivation, 19. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 207-286.
  1772. Foucault, Michel 2005. The Hermeneutics of the Subject: Lectures at the Collège de France, 1981-1982. Edited by Frédéric Gros et al.. Translated by Graham Burchell. New York: Picador.
  1773. Ainsalu, Annaliisa 2000. Suhtluse reguleerimine näo- ja pealiigutuste kaudu eestikeelses meediavestluses. Juhendaja: Silvi Tenjes. Tartu Ülikool, Filosoofiateaduskond, Eesti Keele Õppetool. Bakalaureusetöö.
  1774. Foucault, Michel 2005. The Hermeneutics of the Subject: Lectures at the Collège de France, 1981-1982. Edited by Frédéric Gros et al.. Translated by Graham Burchell. New York: Picador.
  1775. Buchanan, Brett 2008. Onto-Ethologies: The Animal Environments of Uexküll, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, and Deleuze. Albany: SUNY Press.
  1776. Merleau-Ponty, Maurice 2004[1948]. The World of Perception. Translated by Oliver Davis. London; New York: Routledge.
  1777. Birdwhistell, Ray L. 1970. Kinesic and Context: Essays on Body-Motion Communication. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
  1778. Hunt, Edward E. Jr. 1971. Review of Kinesics and Context by Ray L. Birdwhistell. American Anthropologist 73(4): 948-950.
  1779. La Barre, Weston 1972. Review of Kinesics and Context by Ray L. Birdwhistell. American Journal of Sociology 77(5): 999-1000.
  1780. Kendon, Adam 1972. Review of Kinesics and Context by Ray L. Birdwhistell. The American Journal of Psychology 85(3): 441-455.
  1781. Page, Edaward C. 1985. Political Authority and Bureaucratic Power: A Comparative Analysis. Knoxville: The University of Tennessee Press.
  1782. Birdwhistell, Ray L. 1971. Kinesic and Context: Essays on Body-Motion Communication. London: The Penguin Press.
  1783. Mead, Margaret 1969. From Intuition to Analysis in Communication Research. Semiotica 1(1): 13-25.
  1784. Pelc, Jerzy 1969. Meanins as an Instrument. Semiotica 1(1): 26-48.
  1785. Ekman, Paul, and Wallace V. Friesen 1969b. The Repertoire of Nonverbal Behavior: Categories, Origins, Usage, and Coding. Semiotica 1(1): 49-98.
  1786. Scholte, Bob 1969. Review of Penelopean Effort: The Analysis of Myths by Claude Lévi-Strauss. Semiotica 1(1): 99-124.
  1787. Cushamn, Donald and Cordon C. Whiting 1972. An Approach to Communication Theory: Toward Consensus and Rules. Journal of Communication 22(3): 217-238.
  1788. Tesser, Abraham; Sidney Rosen and Thomas Batchelor 1972. Some Message Variables and the MUM Effect. Journal of Communication 22(3): 239-256.
  1789. Wolff, Peter and Joyce Gutstein 1972. Effects of Induced Motor Gestures on Vocal Output. Journal of Communication 22(3): 277-288.
  1790. Cardiner, James C. 1972. The Effects of Expected and Perceived Receiver Responses on Source Attitudes. Journal of Communication 22(3): 289-299.
  1791. Baker, Eldon E. 1972. Implictions and Explications. Journal of Communication 22(3): 317-319.
  1792. Tenjes, Silvi 2001. Nonverbal Means as Regulators in Communication: Sociocultural Perspectives. Tartu: Tartu University Press.
  1793. Harré, Rom & Secord, P. F. 1976. The Explanation of Social Behaviour. Oxford: Blackwell.
  1794. Mehrabian, Albert 1972. Nonverbal Communication. Los Angeles: University of California Press.
  1795. Harrison, Randall P. and Mark L. Knapp 1972. Toward an Understanding of Nonverbal Communication Systems. Journal of Communication 22(4): 339-352.
  1796. Ekman, Paul and Wallace V. Friesen 1972. Hand Movements. Journal of Communication 22(4): 353-374.
  1797. Ellsworth, Phoebe C. and Linda M. Ludwig 1972. Visual Behavior in Social Interaction. Journal of Communication 22(4): 375-403.
  1798. Dittmann, Allen T. 1972. Developmental factors in Conversational Behavior. Journal of Communication 22(4): 404-423.
  1799. Rosenfeld, Howard M. 1972. The Experimental Analysis of Interpersonal Influence Processes. Journal of Communication 22(4): 424-442.
  1800. Watson, O. Michael 1972. Conflicts and Directions in Proxemic Research. Journal of Communication 22(4): 443-459.
  1801. Nigu, Leenu 2008. Keha ja Tähendus Nüüdistantsus: Fine5 Tantsuteatri lavastus "Panus". Juhendaja: Silvi Salupere. Tartu Ülikool, Filosoofiateaduskond, Semiootika osakond. Magistritöö.
  1802. Tenjes, Silvi 1995. Žestid Eestikeelses Dialoogis. Juhendaja: Holdur Õim. Tartu Ülikool, Filosoofiateaduskond, Eesti Filoloogia Osakond. Magistritöö.
  1803. Gramigna, Remo 2011. Augustine On Lying: A Semiotic Analysis. University of Tartu, Department of Semiotics. Unpublished masters thesis.
  1804. Argyle, Michael 1975. Bodily Communication. London: Methuen.
  1805. Lõhmus, Silvi 1991. Paralingvistiliste vahendite uurimine ja nende kasutamine eestikeelses kõnes. Juhendaja: Haldur Õim. Tartu Ülikool, Eesti keele kateeder. Diplomitöö.
  1806. Randviir, Anti 2004. Mapping the World: Towards a sociosemiotic approach to culture. Supervisor: Peeter Torop. University of Tartu, Department of Semiotics. Doctors thesis.
  1807. Foucault, Michel 2008. The Birth of Biopolitics: Lectures at the College de France 1978-1979. Edited by Michel Senellart. New York: Picador.
  1808. Key, Mary Ritchie 1980. Preface. In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, vii-xii.
  1809. Condon, William S. 1980. The Relation of Interactional Synchrony to Cognitive and Emotional Processes. In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, 49-66.
  1810. Leonard-Dolan, Carolyn 1980. A Method for Film Analysis of Ethnic Communication Style. In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, 93-100.
  1811. Bruneau, Thomas J. 1980. Chronemics and the Verbal-Nonverbal Interface. In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, 101-118.
  1812. Heeschen, Volker; Wulf Schiefenhövel and Irenäus Eibl-Eibesfeldt 1980. Requesting, Giving, and Taking: The Relationship Between Verbal and Nonverbal Behavior in the Speech Community of the Eipo, Irian Jaya (West New Guinea). In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, 139-166.
  1813. Fónagy, Ivan 1980. Preverbal Communication and Linguistic Evolution. In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, 167-184.
  1814. Rosenfeld, Howard M. and Margaret Hancks 1980. The Nonverbal Context of Verbal Listener Responses. In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, 193-206.
  1815. Wiener, Morton; Robert Shilkret and Shannon Devoe 1980. 'Acquisition' of Communication Competence: Is Language Enough? In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, 275-294.
  1816. Umiker-Sebeok, Jean D. 1980. Silence is Golden? The Changing Role of Non-Talk in Preschool Conversations. In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, 295-315.
  1817. Szent-Györgyi, Albert M. 1980. Dionysians and Apollonians. In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, 317-318.
  1818. Cloak, F. T. Jr. 1980. Why Electromagnetism is the Only Causal 'Spook' Required to Explain Completely Any Human Behavior or Institution. In: Key, Mary Ritche (ed.), The Relationship of Verbal and Nonverbal Communication. The Hague; Paris: Mouton Publishers, 327-349.
  1819. Bayard, Pierre 2007. How to Talk About Books You Haven't Read. New York: Bloomsbury.
  1820. Knapp, Mark L. 1972. Nonverbal Communication In Human Interaction. New York (etc.): Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
  1821. Morris, Desmond 1969. The Naked Ape. New York: Dell Book.
  1822. Tenjes, Silvi 2001. Nonverbal Means as Regulators in Communication: Sociocultural Perspectives. Tartu: Tartu University Press.
  1823. Ruesch, Jurgen and Weldon Kees 1956. Nonverbal Communication: Notes on the visual perception of human relations. Berkley; Los Angeles: University of California Press.
  1824. Randviir, Anti 2004. Mapping the World: Towards A Sociosemiotic Approach To Culture. Tartu: Tartu University Press.
  1825. Dijk, Teun Adrianus van 2005. Ideoloogia: Multidistsiplinaarne Käsitlus. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus.
  1826. Lotman, Juri 1999. Semiosfäärist. Tallinn: Vagabund.
  1827. Žižek, Slavoj 2003. Ideoloogia Ülev Objekt. Tallinn: Vagabund.
  1828. Foucault, Michel 2011. Teadmine, Võim, Subjekt: Valik räägitust ja kirjutatust. Tallinn: Varrak.
  1829. Tomberg, Jaak 2011. Kirjanduse Lepitav Otstarve. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus.
  1830. Berdyaev, Nicolas 1957. The Beginning and the End. New York: Harper Torchbooks.
  1831. Lotman, Juri 2010. Kultuuritüpoloogiast. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus.
  1832. Petrilli, Susan 2004. From pragmatic philosophy to behavioral semiotics: Charles W. Morris after Charles S. Peirce. Semiotica 148: 277–315.
  1833. Pavis, Patrice 2003. Analysing Performance: Theater, Dance and Film. Translated by David Williams. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
  1834. Baudrillard, Jean 1983. Simulatons. New York: Semiotext(e).
  1835. Sebeok, Thomas A. 2001. Signs: An Introduction to Semiotics. Toronto: University of Toronto Press.
  1836. Moore, Richard G. and Anne Garland 2003. Cognitive Therapy for Chronic and Persistent Depression. Hoboken: John Wiley & Sons.
  1837. Valsiner, Jaan 2000. Culture and Human Development. California: Sage Publications.
  1838. Lotman, Juri 1991. Kultuurisemiootika: Tekst - kirjandus - kultuur. Tallinn: Olion.
  1839. Bowden, Mark 2010. Winning Body Language: Control the Conversation, Command Attention, and Convey the Right Message - Without Saying a Word. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  1840. Smith, Howard A. 2001. Psychosemiotics. New York: Peter Lang.
  1841. Hall, Edward T. 1969. The Hidden Dimension. New York: Anchor Books.
  1842. Aro, Viljar 1987. Emotsioonid, stress ja ängistus tavalises ning matemaatika-füüsika süvaõppega klassis. Juhendaja: Anne Lange. Tartu Ülikool, Loogika ja psühholoogia kateeder. Diplomitöö.
  1843. Deely, John 2009. Basics of Semiotics. 5th edition. Tartu: Tartu University Press.
  1844. Randviir, Anti 2002. Space and place as substrates of culture. In: Sarapik, V., K. Tüür and M. Laanemets (eds.), Koht ja Paik II. Place and Location II. Tallinn: Proceedings of the Estonian Academy of Arts, 140-154.
  1845. Blumer, Herbert 2004. George Herbert Mead and Human Conduct. Lanham: Altamira Press.
  1846. Alekand, Katrin 2008. Kirjatud Kehad ja Kehakirjad - Henna. Juhendajad: Myrdene Anderson; Silvi Salupere. Tartu Ülikool, Filosoofiateaduskond, Filosoofia ja semiootika instituut, Semiootika osajond. Magistritöö.
  1847. Driver, Janine 2010. You Say More Than You Think: Use the New Body Language to Get What You Want!, the 7-day Plan. New York: Crown Archetype.
  1848. Fast, Julius 1971. Body Language. London: Pan Books.
  1849. Buck, Ross and C. Arthur VanLear 2002. Verbal and Nonverbal Communication: Distinguishing Symbolic, Spontaneous, and Pseudo-Spontaneous Nonverbal Behavior. Journal of Communication 52(3): 522-541.
  1850. Swartz, David 1997. Culture and Power: The Sociology Of Pierre Bordieu. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press.
  1851. Ventsel, Andreas 2005. "Meie" konstrueerimine Eesti poliitilises retoorikas 1940.-1953.a. Juhendaja: Ülle Pärli. Tartu Ülikool, Semiootika osakond. Magistritöö.
  1852. Jameson, Frederic 1998. The Cultural Turn: Selected Writings on the Postmodern (1983-1998). Brooklyn: Verso Books.
  1853. Verstegen, Ian 2005. Arnheim, Gestalt and Art: A Psychological Theory. New York: Springer-Verlag Wien.
  1854. Leeuwen, Theo van 2005. Introducing Social Semiotics. New York: Routledge.
  1855. Randviir, Anti 2004. Mapping the World: Towards a Sociosemiotic Approach to Culture. Tartu: Tartu University Press.
  1856. Wharton, Tim 2009. Pragmatics and Non-Verbal Communication. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
  1857. Allport, Gordon W. 1970. The Individual and His Religion: A Psychological Interpretation. New York: Macmillan Publishing.
  1858. Rowlands, Mark 2006. Body Language: Representation in Action. Cambridge; London: MIT Press.
  1859. Taylor, Charles 2000. Autentsuse Eetika. Tõlkinud ja järelsõna: Märt Väljataga. Tallinn: Hortus Litterarum.
  1860. Luhmann, Niklas 1995. Social Systems. Translated by John Bednarz, Jr. and Dirk Baecker. Foreword by Eva M. Knodt. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
  1861. Hobbes, Thomas 1996. Leviathan. Edited by Richard Tuck. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Fiction

Other

Quoteless

A New Series

| Labels:

0 comments:

Post a Comment

Subscribe to: Post Comments (Atom)